From 6b777359a58dba47647a289309e43412a8818d97 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yuri Chornoivan Date: Fri, 6 Nov 2020 14:37:23 +0200 Subject: Add Hebrew translation from Tx --- docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po | 710 ++ docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml | 56 + docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml | 60 + docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml | 119 + docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml | 340 + docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml | 67 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po | 4425 +++++++++ docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml | 104 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml | 91 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml | 187 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml | 138 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml | 184 + .../docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml | 384 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml | 98 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml | 147 + .../stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml | 57 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml | 98 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml | 17 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml | 130 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml | 52 + .../stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml | 42 + .../stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml | 27 + .../docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml | 37 + .../stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml | 39 + .../stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml | 79 + .../stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml | 95 + .../stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml | 111 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml | 16 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml | 111 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml | 223 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml | 32 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml | 67 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml | 53 + .../stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml | 22 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml | 59 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml | 228 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml | 14 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml | 22 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml | 62 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml | 59 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml | 223 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml | 25 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml | 33 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml | 51 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml | 58 + .../stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml | 79 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml | 64 + .../stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml | 27 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml | 99 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml | 41 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml | 281 + .../installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml | 19 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml | 52 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml | 22 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml | 47 + .../docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml | 52 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml | 81 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml | 48 + docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml | 30 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po | 9609 ++++++++++++++++++++ docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml | 62 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml | 46 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml | 46 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml | 129 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml | 81 + .../stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml | 68 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml | 88 + .../stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml | 52 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml | 89 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml | 80 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml | 29 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml | 39 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml | 189 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml | 34 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml | 71 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml | 50 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml | 18 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml | 808 ++ docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml | 20 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml | 82 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml | 20 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml | 86 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml | 65 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml | 100 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml | 123 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml | 34 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml | 19 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml | 152 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml | 237 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml | 165 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml | 37 + .../docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml | 211 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml | 226 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml | 54 + .../stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml | 49 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml | 35 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml | 20 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml | 81 + .../docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml | 111 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml | 20 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml | 194 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml | 117 + .../docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml | 102 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml | 238 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml | 142 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml | 17 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml | 87 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml | 43 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml | 55 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml | 111 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml | 26 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml | 50 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml | 41 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml | 101 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml | 23 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml | 31 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml | 82 + .../stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml | 53 + .../docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml | 44 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml | 50 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml | 34 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml | 76 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml | 34 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml | 26 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml | 358 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml | 42 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml | 251 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml | 259 + .../stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml | 39 + .../stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml | 341 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml | 138 + docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml | 154 + 132 files changed, 27088 insertions(+) create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml (limited to 'docs') diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f15db16c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po @@ -0,0 +1,710 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Boot ISO Help package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan , 2019 +# Yaron Shahrabani , 2020 +# Omer I.S., 2020 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Boot ISO Help 6.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-01-18 19:11+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2017-04-04 18:35+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Omer I.S., 2020\n" +"Language-Team: Hebrew (https://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"he/)\n" +"Language: he\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n == 1 && n % 1 == 0) ? 0 : (n == 2 && n % " +"1 == 0) ? 1: (n % 10 == 0 && n % 1 == 0 && n > 10) ? 2 : 3;\n" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:10 +msgid "en" +msgstr "he" + +#. type: Content of:
+#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:12 en/NetInstall.xml:11 +msgid "Mageia NetInstall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:14 +msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" +msgstr "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:20 +msgid "May 2018" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:22 +msgid "Mageia 7" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:27 +msgid "The tool to install Mageia with remote repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:32 +msgid "../mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:36 en/NetInstall.xml:22 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:40 en/NetInstall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</" +"link> שפותחה על ידי <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:44 en/NetInstall.xml:30 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link " +"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation " +"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><article><title> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:52 +msgid "Installing Mageia using a Tiny Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:11 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "מבוא" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:14 +msgid "NetInstall Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:17 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "תיאור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:19 +msgid "These minimal ISO's contain:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:23 +msgid "" +"less than 100 MB and are convenient if bandwidth is too low to download a " +"full DVD, or if you have a PC without a DVD drive or unable to boot from a " +"USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:29 +msgid "" +"no more than that which is needed to a) start the <literal>DrakX</literal> " +"installer and b) find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other " +"packages that are needed to continue and complete the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The required source packages may be on a PC hard disk, a local drive, a " +"local network or on the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:40 +msgid "Installation via encrypted wifi or bluetooth is not supported." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:46 +msgid "Availability" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:48 +msgid "There a two versions of the NetInstall media:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:52 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">netinstall.iso</emphasis> For those who prefer not " +"to use non-free software, this ISO contains only free software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:58 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">netinstall-nonfree.iso</emphasis> This ISO " +"additionally includes proprietary device drivers, which may be required for " +"your network device, disk controller, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Both versions are available in the form of separate 32-bit and 64-bit ISO's. " +"See here: <link xlink:href=\"https://www.mageia.org/downloads/\">https://www." +"mageia.org/downloads/</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:70 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:72 +msgid "" +"After downloading the image, burn it to a CD/DVD or, if you prefer to put it " +"on a USB stick, follow the instructions here: <link xlink:href=\"https://" +"wiki.mageia.org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick" +"\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:79 +msgid "Installation Stages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:81 +msgid "The installation is carried out in two stages:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 1</emphasis> This is the pre-Installation " +"stage. You will need to provide the method and details for accessing the " +"medium containing the files to be used for the installation. If the method " +"involves a server, then the network connection will be activated." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:93 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 2</emphasis> This is the actual Installation " +"stage, which will automatically commence once a connection to the installer " +"files has been established." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:100 +msgid "" +"During Stage 1, nothing will be written to your Hard Disk, so it is safe to " +"quit at any point during Stage 1 if you wish. You can do so by pressing " +"<keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </" +"keycombo>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:112 +msgid "" +"You can use <keycombo> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F3</keycap> </keycombo> " +"to read the logs and <keycombo> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F1</keycap> </" +"keycombo> to return to the installer screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Unlike when installing from DVD or LiveCD, during the first part of the " +"installation (<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 1</emphasis>), you will be asked " +"to type things. During this stage, your keyboard will operate as per an " +"<link xlink:href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/" +"Keyboard_layout#United_States\">American keyboard</link> layout. This can be " +"very confusing when you need to type names and paths." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:15 +msgid "Stage 1 (Pre-installation Stage)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:18 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "אתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:20 +msgid "" +"The particular <emphasis>Welcome Screen</emphasis> that you will see when " +"booting with the NetInstall media depends on whether you are booting on a " +"BIOS or UEFI system. See the following two screenshots:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:25 +msgid "BIOS Welcome Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:29 +msgid "../dx-help.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:27 en/netInstall-stage1.xml:42 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:34 +msgid "" +"When booting up, you can choose to read the advanced help by pressing " +"<keycap>F2</keycap> and return to the installer screen by pressing " +"<keycap>F1</keycap>. Otherwise, the boot will continue with default settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:40 +msgid "UEFI Welcome Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:44 +msgid "../net-welcome2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Use the arrow keys to highlight <emphasis>Start Mageia Install</emphasis> " +"and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:56 +msgid "" +"For both BIOS and UEFI systems, you will then see a pop-up notification " +"saying that USB devices are being detected:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:61 +msgid "../netInstall-01.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:67 +msgid "Installation Method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:69 +msgid "" +"You can now choose an installation method via CDROM/HDD or Server (NFS, FTP " +"or HTTP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:72 +msgid "You also have the option to load third-party modules at this point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:77 +msgid "../netInstall-02.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Move up or down the list using the arrow keys until the appropriate method " +"of installation is highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:88 +msgid "" +"Press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key until <emphasis>Ok</emphasis> is " +"highlighted and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:94 +msgid "Server" +msgstr "שרת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:98 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose for a Network Installation, choose " +"<emphasis>FTP server</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:103 +msgid "" +"On an enterprise network, FTP and rsync may be blocked, so using " +"<emphasis>HTTP server</emphasis> is a good choice in this case." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:109 +msgid "" +"After choosing any of the server options you will automatically proceed to " +"the <emphasis><xref linkend=\"netConn\"/></emphasis> section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:115 +msgid "CDROM/HDD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you choose to install from either a CDROM or hard disk (or USB stick), a " +"scan for storage devices will be performed:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:122 +msgid "../netInstall-03.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:128 +msgid "First, select the relevant hard drive (or USB stick)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:134 +msgid "../netInstall-04.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:140 +msgid "Followed by the relevant partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:146 +msgid "../netInstall-05.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:152 +msgid "Then specify the directory or the file name of the ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:156 +msgid "" +"Leaving this open, or using the directory is easier, because the installer " +"then presents you with a list of directories and files from which you can " +"make your selection using the up and down arrows, as seen in the second of " +"the following images." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:163 +msgid "../netInstall-06.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:169 +msgid "../netInstall-07.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:173 +msgid "" +"Once the information has been provided for the location of the ISO, either " +"on CDROM or HDD, you will automatically proceed to <emphasis><xref linkend=" +"\"netStageTwo\"/></emphasis> (the actual installation stage)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:180 +msgid "Load Third-Party Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:182 +msgid "" +"If you wish to <emphasis>Load third-party modules</emphasis>, then you will " +"be asked for the location of the directory containing the modules:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:188 +msgid "../netInstall-08.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:195 +msgid "Network Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:198 +msgid "Connection Device" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:200 +msgid "" +"If you chose any of the server options at the <emphasis>Installation Method</" +"emphasis> step, you will then be asked to choose a network device:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:206 +msgid "../netInstall-09.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:212 +msgid "Connection Type" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:214 +msgid "" +"Now you need to choose whether the network device will use a DHCP, Static or " +"ADSL connection:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:219 +msgid "../netInstall-10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:223 +msgid "" +"If you are unsure which option is suitable, then you should probably accept " +"the default option (DHCP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:228 +msgid "Host/Domain Names" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:230 +msgid "If necessary, you can now supply your Host and Domain names:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:235 +msgid "../netInstall-11.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:241 +msgid "" +"If you are unsure what this means then you can just leave the fields blank, " +"highlight <emphasis>Ok</emphasis> and press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to " +"proceed. The network connection will now be activated." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:248 +msgid "" +"If you are using either FTP or HTTP, you will automatically proceed to the " +"<emphasis><xref linkend=\"netMirrors\"/></emphasis> section" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:252 +msgid "" +"If you are using NFS, you will be asked for the NFS server name and the " +"directory containing the Mageia distribution:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:257 +msgid "../netInstall-12.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:261 +msgid "" +"After entering the NFS details, you will automatically proceed to " +"<emphasis><xref linkend=\"netStageTwo\"/></emphasis> (the actual " +"installation stage)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:268 +msgid "Mirrors" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:270 +msgid "" +"If using FTP or HTTP, you now have to specify a mirror to use. This can be " +"done manually or by choosing from a list" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:275 +msgid "../netInstall-13.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:280 +msgid "Specify Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:282 +msgid "" +"You will find a list of all available mirrors here: <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://mirrors.mageia.org/\">http://mirrors.mageia.org/</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:285 +msgid "" +"Whichever mirror you choose, it should use the same tree-like structure from " +"\"mageia\" (or \"Mageia\") as used by the official Mageia mirrors. That " +"means .../mageia/distrib/<version>/<arch>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:290 +msgid "" +"A correct entry (when using an official mirror) in the <emphasis>Mageia " +"directory</emphasis> field below, could be:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:293 +msgid "<filename>pub/linux/mageia/distrib/cauldron/i586</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:295 +msgid "Another example (for Mageia 6 x86_64) could be:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:297 +msgid "<filename>pub/Mirrors/Mageia/distrib/6/x86_64</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:299 +msgid "" +"Other mirrors may have a different path structure and the screenshots below " +"show such examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:302 +msgid "If you are using an FTP server:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:306 +msgid "../netInstall-14.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:310 +msgid "If you are using an HTTP server:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:314 +msgid "../netInstall-15.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:318 en/netInstall-stage1.xml:344 +msgid "" +"Once this information has been provided, you will automatically proceed to " +"<emphasis><xref linkend=\"netStageTwo\"/></emphasis> (the actual " +"installation stage)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:324 +msgid "Select From a List" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:326 +msgid "" +"If you get a lot of missing dependency errors later in the install, reboot " +"and try a different mirror." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:331 +msgid "../netInstall-16.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:335 +msgid "" +"After choosing an FTP server, you will see a screen where you can optionally " +"add a login name and password if required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:340 +msgid "../netInstall-17.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage2.xml:15 +msgid "Stage 2 (Installation Stage)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage2.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Nothing has been written to your hard disk at this point. Therefore, if you " +"decide not to proceed with the actual installation, then it is safe to " +"reboot now: go to <literal>tty2</literal> with <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</" +"keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> and press " +"<keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </" +"keycombo> (or <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> " +"<keycap>F7</keycap> </keycombo> to come back if you change your mind)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><subtitle> +#: en/NetInstall.xml:13 +msgid "Installing Mageia Using a Tiny Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/NetInstall.xml:17 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..709bf445 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="NetInstall-cover"> + <info> + <title>Mageia NetInstall + + Mageia.org + + + + May 2018 + + Mageia 7 + + + + + The tool to install Mageia with remote repositories + + + + + + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + +
+ Installing Mageia using a Tiny Boot Image + + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf6d6493 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + +
+ + + + + + Mageia NetInstall + + Installing Mageia Using a Tiny Boot Image + + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e23d59ff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + +
+ + + +מבוא + +
+ NetInstall Media + +
+ תיאור + + These minimal ISO's contain: + + + + less than 100 MB and are convenient if bandwidth is too low to download a +full DVD, or if you have a PC without a DVD drive or unable to boot from a +USB stick. + + + + no more than that which is needed to a) start the DrakX +installer and b) find DrakX-installer-stage2 and other +packages that are needed to continue and complete the install. + + + + The required source packages may be on a PC hard disk, a local drive, a +local network or on the Internet. + + + Installation via encrypted wifi or bluetooth is not supported. + +
+ +
+ Availability + + There a two versions of the NetInstall media: + + + + netinstall.iso For those who prefer not to +use non-free software, this ISO contains only free software. + + + + netinstall-nonfree.iso This ISO +additionally includes proprietary device drivers, which may be required for +your network device, disk controller, etc. + + + + Both versions are available in the form of separate 32-bit and 64-bit +ISO's. See here: https://www.mageia.org/downloads/ +
+ +
+ Preparation + + After downloading the image, burn it to a CD/DVD or, if you prefer to put it +on a USB stick, follow the instructions here: https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick +
+
+ +
+ Installation Stages + + The installation is carried out in two stages: + + + + Stage 1 This is the pre-Installation +stage. You will need to provide the method and details for accessing the +medium containing the files to be used for the installation. If the method +involves a server, then the network connection will be activated. + + + + Stage 2 This is the actual Installation +stage, which will automatically commence once a connection to the installer +files has been established. + + + + + During Stage 1, nothing will be written to your Hard Disk, so it is safe to +quit at any point during Stage 1 if you wish. You can do so by pressing + Ctrl Alt Del +. + + + + You can use Alt F3 +to read the logs and Alt F1 + to return to the installer screen. + + + + Unlike when installing from DVD or LiveCD, during the first part of the +installation (Stage 1), you will be asked +to type things. During this stage, your keyboard will operate as per an +American +keyboard layout. This can be very confusing when you need to type +names and paths. + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6b925c18 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + +Stage 1 (Pre-installation Stage) + +
+ אתחול + + The particular Welcome Screen that you will see when +booting with the NetInstall media depends on whether you are booting on a +BIOS or UEFI system. See the following two screenshots: + +
+ BIOS Welcome Screen + + + + + +
+ + When booting up, you can choose to read the advanced help by pressing +F2 and return to the installer screen by pressing +F1. Otherwise, the boot will continue with default +settings. + +
+ UEFI Welcome Screen + + + + + +
+ + + + Use the arrow keys to highlight Start Mageia Install +and then press Enter. + + + + For both BIOS and UEFI systems, you will then see a pop-up notification +saying that USB devices are being detected: + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Installation Method + + You can now choose an installation method via CDROM/HDD or Server (NFS, FTP +or HTTP). + + You also have the option to load third-party modules at this point. + + + + + + + + + + Move up or down the list using the arrow keys until the appropriate method +of installation is highlighted. + + + + Press the Tab key until Ok is +highlighted and then press Enter. + + + +
+ שרת + + + + If you don't know what to choose for a Network Installation, choose +FTP server. + + + + On an enterprise network, FTP and rsync may be blocked, so using +HTTP server is a good choice in this case. + + + + After choosing any of the server options you will automatically proceed to +the section. +
+ +
+ CDROM/HDD + + If you choose to install from either a CDROM or hard disk (or USB stick), a +scan for storage devices will be performed: + + + + + + + + + + First, select the relevant hard drive (or USB stick) + + + + + + + + + + + + Followed by the relevant partition + + + + + + + + + + + + Then specify the directory or the file name of the ISO + + + + Leaving this open, or using the directory is easier, because the installer +then presents you with a list of directories and files from which you can +make your selection using the up and down arrows, as seen in the second of +the following images. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Once the information has been provided for the location of the ISO, either +on CDROM or HDD, you will automatically proceed to (the actual installation stage). +
+ +
+ Load Third-Party Modules + + If you wish to Load third-party modules, then you will +be asked for the location of the directory containing the modules: + + + + + + +
+
+ +
+ Network Connection + +
+ Connection Device + + If you chose any of the server options at the Installation +Method step, you will then be asked to choose a network device: + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Connection Type + + Now you need to choose whether the network device will use a DHCP, Static or +ADSL connection: + + + + + + + + If you are unsure which option is suitable, then you should probably accept +the default option (DHCP). +
+ +
+ Host/Domain Names + + If necessary, you can now supply your Host and Domain names: + + + + + + + + + + If you are unsure what this means then you can just leave the fields blank, +highlight Ok and press Enter to +proceed. The network connection will now be activated. + + + + If you are using either FTP or HTTP, you will automatically proceed to the + section + + If you are using NFS, you will be asked for the NFS server name and the +directory containing the Mageia distribution: + + + + + + + + After entering the NFS details, you will automatically proceed to + (the actual installation +stage). +
+
+ +
+ Mirrors + + If using FTP or HTTP, you now have to specify a mirror to use. This can be +done manually or by choosing from a list + + + + + + + +
+ Specify Manually + + You will find a list of all available mirrors here: http://mirrors.mageia.org/ + + Whichever mirror you choose, it should use the same tree-like structure from +"mageia" (or "Mageia") as used by the official Mageia mirrors. That means +.../mageia/distrib/<version>/<arch> + + A correct entry (when using an official mirror) in the Mageia +directory field below, could be: + + pub/linux/mageia/distrib/cauldron/i586 + + Another example (for Mageia 6 x86_64) could be: + + pub/Mirrors/Mageia/distrib/6/x86_64 + + Other mirrors may have a different path structure and the screenshots below +show such examples: + + If you are using an FTP server: + + + + + + + + If you are using an HTTP server: + + + + + + + + Once this information has been provided, you will automatically proceed to + (the actual installation +stage). +
+ +
+ Select From a List + + If you get a lot of missing dependency errors later in the install, reboot +and try a different mirror. + + + + + + + + After choosing an FTP server, you will see a screen where you can optionally +add a login name and password if required. + + + + + + + + Once this information has been provided, you will automatically proceed to + (the actual installation +stage). +
+
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54d9e6f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + +Stage 2 (Installation Stage) + + Nothing has been written to your hard disk at this point. Therefore, if you +decide not to proceed with the actual installation, then it is safe to +reboot now: go to tty2 with +Ctrl Alt F2 +and press Ctrl Alt +Del (or Ctrl +Alt F7 to come back if you +change your mind). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3917f1b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po @@ -0,0 +1,4425 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package. +# +# Translators: +# Omer I.S., 2020 +# Yaron Shahrabani , 2020 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2020-06-29 21:35+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-11-06 09:06+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Omer I.S.\n" +"Language-Team: Hebrew (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/language/" +"he/)\n" +"Language: he\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n == 1 && n % 1 == 0) ? 0 : (n == 2 && n % " +"1 == 0) ? 1: (n % 10 == 0 && n % 1 == 0 && n > 10) ? 2 : 3;\n" + +#. type: Content of:
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:31 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "רישיון והערות שחרור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:46 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "הסכם רישיון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions " +"carefully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:56 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must " +"be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:61 +msgid "" +"To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on " +"<emphasis>Next</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:66 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your " +"interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your " +"computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:76 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "הערות שחרור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by " +"clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:3 +msgid "Supplemental Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy. +#. 2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source. " +"The source selection determines which packages will be available during the " +"subsequent steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:28 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:32 +msgid "Choosing and activating the network, if not already up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Tainted</" +"emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, " +"you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit " +"packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by " +"selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only " +"contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be " +"able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, " +"the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:9 +msgid "User Management" +msgstr "ניהול משתמשים" + +#. Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask) +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography. +#. 2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6. +#. 2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management). +#. Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'. +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style. +#. 2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png. +#. 2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata fileref=\"live-user1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:40 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:44 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a <literal>superuser</" +"literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the <emphasis>root </" +"emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:51 +msgid "" +"As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from red-to-" +"yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green shield " +"shows you are using a strong password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:55 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:63 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "הזנת פרטי משתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the " +"<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office " +"applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a " +"computer for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Icon</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">סמל</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:75 +msgid "Click on this button if you want to change the user's icon" +msgstr "יש ללחוץ על סמל זה אם ברצונך לשנות את סמל המשתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:80 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Real Name</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">השם האמיתי</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:82 +msgid "Insert the user's real name into this text box" +msgstr "יש להזין את השם האמתי של המשתמש בתיבת טקסט זו" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:86 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:88 +msgid "" +"Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real " +"name. <emphasis role=\"bold\">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><caution><simpara> +#: en/addUser.xml:93 +msgid "" +"The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for " +"your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be " +"written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as " +"Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:102 en/setupBootloader.xml:135 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">סיסמה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:104 +msgid "Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user " +"password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is " +"both read and write protected (umask=0027)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:117 +msgid "" +"You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</" +"emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:121 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:128 +msgid "User Management (advanced)" +msgstr "ניהול משתמשים (מתקדם)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:131 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings " +"for the user you are adding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:136 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the " +"shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are " +"<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you " +"added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, " +"then leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:149 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if " +"unsure, leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:10 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "בחירת נקודות עיגון" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points " +"yourself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55 +msgid "" +"To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For " +"example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and <filename>5</" +"filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed by " +"the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:63 +msgid "" +"If you have several partitions, you can choose various different " +"<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as " +"<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and <filename>/var</" +"filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for instance <filename>/" +"video</filename> for a partition where you want to store your films, or " +"perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:73 +msgid "" +"For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the " +"mount point field blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename> " +"(root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to " +"go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where " +"you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:90 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <emphasis>Next</" +"emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition " +"suggested by DrakX, or more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bestTime.xml:5 +msgid "Clock Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/bestTime.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"bestTime.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local " +"time or UTC time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time " +"synchronization and specify an NTP server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:10 +msgid "Boot Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:14 +msgid "Booting the medium" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug " +"the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:19 +msgid "" +"If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need " +"to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try " +"accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer " +"will boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:24 +msgid "" +"To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try " +"pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or <keycap>Esc</" +"keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>, <keycap>F8</keycap>, " +"<keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the boot device menu. These " +"(fairly common) keys are just a selection of possible options though." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media " +"will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or " +"UEFI type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:39 +msgid "In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\" align=\"center\"/> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:46 +msgid "First screen while booting in BIOS mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:50 en/bootLive.xml:104 en/installer.xml:108 +#: en/installer.xml:156 +msgid "Menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:52 en/bootLive.xml:106 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot Mageia</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB " +"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:56 +msgid "Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:60 en/bootLive.xml:72 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to boot)</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:62 +msgid "Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:68 en/bootLive.xml:112 en/installer.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install Mageia</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:69 en/bootLive.xml:113 +msgid "This option will install Mageia to a hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:74 +msgid "Install Mageia using non-free video drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:79 en/installer.xml:127 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Memory Test</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:80 en/installer.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write operations. " +"Reboot to end the test." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:84 en/bootLive.xml:116 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\"> F2 Language</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:85 en/bootLive.xml:117 +msgid "" +"Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language " +"during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then " +"press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:93 +msgid "In UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:100 +msgid "First screen while booting in UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:107 +msgid "" +"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB " +"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). Once the " +"boot is done, you can proceed to the installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:123 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options " +"duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will " +"be suffixed with \"USB\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:16 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "בחירת שולחן עבודה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:23 +msgid "Some choices made here will open other screens with related options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the " +"installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing " +"the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop " +"environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or, " +"actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software " +"choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is " +"lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer " +"packages installed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:3 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "בחירת קבוצת חבילות לפי נושא" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC +#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Workstation</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical Environment</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">סביבה גרפית</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use " +"this option to manually add or remove packages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:40 +msgid "" +"See <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"/> for instructions on how to do a " +"minimal install (without or with X & IceWM)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:3 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:21 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <emphasis>floppy</" +"emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages " +"(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the " +"same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install " +"and choosing to load it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The " +"settings DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:31 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:37 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" " +"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the " +"same timezone." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:32 +msgid "" +"In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time " +"or to GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:27 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:38 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:41 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 en/configureX_monitor.xml:78 +msgid "Vendor" +msgstr "יצרן" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:48 +msgid "then the make of your card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:52 +msgid "and the model of card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and " +"open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver " +"for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides " +"basic capabilities." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><caution><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in " +"some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The " +"<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after " +"your first reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:23 +msgid "Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:34 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user " +"interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply " +"<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other " +"graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings " +"need to be correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are " +"incorrect, or if none are shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphics Card</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable list. " +"See <xref linkend=\"configureX_card_list\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">צג</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:57 +msgid "" +"You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the " +"<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose " +"<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and " +"vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref linkend=" +"\"configureX_monitor\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:65 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">רזולוציה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:68 +msgid "The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">בדיקה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:76 +msgid "" +"The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is " +"there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your " +"settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings " +"will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration " +"screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is " +"satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your " +"settings are on the safe side." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:87 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">אפשרויות</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:90 +msgid "Here you can choose to enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:95 +msgid "" +"There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are " +"outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT " +"displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally " +"enter standby mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:29 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics " +"could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something " +"without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:50 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "התאמה אישית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:59 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:68 +msgid "Plug'n Play" +msgstr "הכנס-הפעל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:71 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor " +"type from the monitor database." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:81 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:90 +msgid "Manufacturer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:94 +msgid "Monitor model" +msgstr "דגם הצג" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:100 +msgid "Generic" +msgstr "כללי" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such " +"as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. " +"This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA " +"card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. " +"Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your selections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:24 +msgid "Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details " +"before you start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage " +"device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>, " +"<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it. " +"<emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label " +"(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click " +"<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:71 +msgid "" +"Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you " +"are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename> partition. " +"The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename> partition must NOT " +"be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System " +"Partition) is present and correctly mounted on <filename>/boot/EFI</" +"filename>. See Figure 1 below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot " +"partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:103 +msgid "EFI System Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:106 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:105 en/diskdrake.xml:119 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:117 +msgid "BIOS boot partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:120 en/doPartitionDisks.xml:206 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "he" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:4 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "חלוקה למחיצות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:31 +msgid "Suggested Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:34 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the " +"DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38 +msgid "" +"The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to " +"the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:43 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:53 +msgid "Main Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות ראשיות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:59 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:68 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia " +"installation but see the warning below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:82 +msgid "" +"With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in " +"light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their " +"intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by " +"clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following " +"screenshot:<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:97 +msgid "" +"This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is " +"a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important " +"files before proceeding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:103 +msgid "" +"The partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:112 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:115 +msgid "This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119 +msgid "" +"This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you " +"intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data " +"on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:127 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:130 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> " +"option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to " +"the following rules:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:142 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is " +"created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:148 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions " +"are created" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:153 +msgid "" +"6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename> " +"with a maximum of 50 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:158 +msgid "1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:163 +msgid "the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:170 +msgid "" +"This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will " +"create three partitions:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:175 +msgid "50 GB for <filename>/</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:179 +msgid "4 GB for <filename>swap</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:183 +msgid "and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:188 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be " +"automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted " +"on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</" +"emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly " +"done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:194 +msgid "" +"If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned " +"disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already exist. " +"It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with the " +"Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any " +"other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for " +"filesystem type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:201 +msgid "See <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/> for information on how to proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:216 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:226 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the " +"partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a " +"drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:231 +msgid "" +"Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a " +"device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an " +"alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following " +"settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:238 +msgid "<emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:242 +msgid "<emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:15 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:54 en/DrakLive.xml:18 +msgid "Installation from LIVE medium" +msgstr "התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:15 +msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" +msgstr "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:23 +msgid "March 2016" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:25 +msgid "Mageia 5" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:30 en/DrakX-cover.xml:28 +msgid "The Official Documentation for Mageia" +msgstr "התיעוד הרשמי עבור Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:33 en/DrakX-cover.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:38 en/DrakLive.xml:27 en/DrakX-cover.xml:36 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:12 en/DrakX.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:42 en/DrakLive.xml:31 en/DrakX-cover.xml:40 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:15 en/DrakX.xml:49 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</" +"link> שפותחה על ידי <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:46 en/DrakX-cover.xml:44 en/DrakX-inline.xml:17 +#: en/DrakX.xml:53 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:56 en/DrakLive.xml:21 en/DrakX-cover.xml:66 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:6 en/DrakX.xml:39 en/selectKeyboard.xml:49 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:57 en/DrakLive.xml:22 en/DrakX-cover.xml:67 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:7 en/DrakX.xml:40 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:60 en/DrakLive.xml:25 en/DrakX-cover.xml:70 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:10 en/DrakX.xml:43 en/selectKeyboard.xml:56 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link " +"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation " +"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:13 en/DrakX-cover.xml:64 en/DrakX-inline.xml:3 +#: en/DrakX.xml:36 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:21 +msgid "February 2014" +msgstr "פברואר 2014" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:23 +msgid "Mageia 4" +msgstr "Mageia 4" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:3 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "ברכות" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to " +"remove the installation medium and reboot your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:22 +msgid "" +"After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating " +"system to start (if there are more than one on your computer)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:30 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Visit <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/\">www.mageia.org/en/</link> " +"if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/firewall.xml:16 +msgid "Firewall" +msgstr "חומת אש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they " +"determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the " +"target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the " +"system to be accessible from the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/firewall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-firewall.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:31 +msgid "" +"In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is " +"accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no firewall)</" +"emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine - an option " +"that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since it would " +"create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the context of " +"the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for temporarily " +"disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and debugging " +"purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:40 +msgid "" +"All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will " +"enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible " +"from the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:44 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">מתקדם</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:46 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable " +"a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank " +"separated)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:50 +msgid "<emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:53 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned " +"to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as " +"defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:57 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> " +"or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the " +"service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:62 +msgid "" +"For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore " +"is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:65 +msgid "" +"In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 " +"couples for the same port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:10 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to " +"check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and " +"then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where " +"you can choose to view details of your partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:54 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selections, click on <emphasis>Next</" +"emphasis> to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/graphicalConfiguration.xml:13 +msgid "Graphical Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:34 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "DrakX, כלי ההתקנה של Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:42 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "צעדי ההתקנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:46 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which " +"is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens, which may also have <emphasis>Advanced</" +"emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details " +"about the particular step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para> +#: en/installer.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it " +"is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para> +#: en/installer.xml:70 +msgid "" +"If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a " +"text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> " +"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that, " +"press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Delete</" +"keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:88 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "מסך קבלת הפנים של ההתקנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:90 +msgid "" +"The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the " +"Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of " +"the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:94 +msgid "" +"The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will " +"start the installer, and is normally all that you will need." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:99 +msgid "Legacy (BIOS) Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will " +"automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:119 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue System</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:121 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing " +"Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:134 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: שפה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:136 +msgid "Press F2 for alternative languages." +msgstr "יש ללחוץ על F2 להצגת שפות חלופיות." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:142 +msgid "UEFI Systems" +msgstr "מערכות UEFI" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:144 +msgid "" +"From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to " +"enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap> " +"to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:159 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:164 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either " +"re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use " +"it to restore a Windows bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:171 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language:</emphasis> Press <keycap>F2</keycap> " +"for alternative languages." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: שפה:</emphasis> יש ללחוץ על <keycap>F2</keycap> " +"להצגת שפות חלופיות." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:176 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, " +"and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with \"USB\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:183 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:186 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "אין ממשק גרפי" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:190 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language " +"Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and " +"older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command> " +"at the prompt." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use this press " +"<keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen and confirm " +"with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black screen with " +"a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command> and press " +"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:210 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware " +"detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined " +"with other parameters as necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:220 +msgid "RAM problem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:222 +msgid "" +"This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where " +"<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of RAM. e.g. " +"<literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:230 +msgid "Dynamic partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:232 +msgid "" +"If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to " +"<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not " +"possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a <literal>Basic</" +"literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link ns2:href=\"http://msdn." +"microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/" +"library/cc776315.aspx</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:25 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "עדכונים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" format=\"png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-installUpdates.png\" format=\"png" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been " +"updated or improved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:54 +msgid "Press <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue" +msgstr "יש ללחוץ על <emphasis>קדימה</emphasis> להמשך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/locale.xml:9 +msgid "Locale" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/login.xml:4 +msgid "Login Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/login.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/login.xml:11 +msgid "SDDM login screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:14 +msgid "Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:15 +msgid "" +"Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find " +"yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live " +"medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can find further documentation in <link xmlns:ns0=\"http://www.w3." +"org/1999/xlink\" ns0:href=\"../../installer/\">the Mageia wiki</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:10 +msgid "Available Media" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. 2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para. +#. 2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:44 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD's, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use " +"this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package selection</" +"emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref linkend=" +"\"choosePackagesTree\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting " +"everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see " +"<xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package " +"selection</emphasis> option in the same screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see " +"screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as " +"documentation and <quote>X</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a " +"lightweight desktop environment) will also be included." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and " +"<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link xlink:" +"href=\"http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html\">Linux Documentation Project</" +"link> and the <link xlink:href=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/" +"manual/\">GNU coreutils</link> info pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Configuration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography. +#. 2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles. +#. 2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:24 +msgid "" +"DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want by pressing <emphasis>Configure</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:30 +msgid "" +"As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings " +"unless:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:33 +msgid "there are known issues with a default setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:37 +msgid "the default setting has already been tried and it fails" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:41 +msgid "some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:49 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Timezone</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:56 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You " +"can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Country / Region</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the " +"setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:70 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:72 +msgid "DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more " +"information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">User management</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:85 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own " +"<filename>/home</filename> directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:91 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Services</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:93 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run in the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see " +"<xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Keyboard</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">מקלדת</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type " +"of keyboard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:118 +msgid "" +"If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind " +"that your passwords are going to change too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:124 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Mouse</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:131 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Sound card</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:133 +msgid "The installer will use the default driver if one is available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:136 en/soundConfig.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other " +"possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, " +"but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you " +"can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:144 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical interface</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:146 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For " +"more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:155 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:169 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:171 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control " +"Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:178 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:185 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Proxies</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:187 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:192 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters " +"you need to enter here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:201 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "הגדרות אבטחה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:206 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:208 +msgid "" +"The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting " +"(Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits " +"your usage." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:215 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Firewall</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:217 +msgid "" +"The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on " +"your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound " +"connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your " +"computer normally." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:223 +msgid "" +"Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are " +"continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly <quote>safe</" +"quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as covert data " +"channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:229 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>." +msgstr "למידע נוסף, נא לראות <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:232 +msgid "" +"Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may " +"be very risky." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/reboot.xml:3 +msgid "Reboot" +msgstr "הפעלה מחדש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/reboot.xml:7 +msgid "" +"Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your " +"computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:9 +msgid "" +"Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">same</emphasis> order." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:16 +msgid "When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:17 +msgid "" +"When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These " +"indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see " +"<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" +"שינוי גודל מחיצת <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> " + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:10 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "סף האבטחה המבוקש:" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for " +"the average user." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for " +"instance if the system is to be used as a public server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Administrator</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will " +"send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations " +"which require notification to a system administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:43 +msgid "" +"A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - " +"where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:48 +msgid "" +"The system sends such messages as <emphasis role=\"bold\">Unix Mailspool " +"messages</emphasis>, not as \"ordinary\" SMTP mail: this user must therefore " +"be configured for receiving such mail!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:53 +msgid "" +"It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in " +"the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:15 +msgid "Select and use ISOs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "מבוא" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose " +"which image best suits your needs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:21 +msgid "There are three types of installation media:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this " +"media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to " +"install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice " +"of which Desktop environment to install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try " +"out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to " +"your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can " +"be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating " +"system itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:37 +msgid "" +"The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you " +"have fewer configuration options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations, " +"they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's " +"containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer " +"and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that " +"are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on " +"the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:53 +msgid "" +"These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if " +"bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a " +"DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:58 +msgid "More details are given in the next sections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:61 +msgid "Media" +msgstr "מדיה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:63 +msgid "Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to " +"install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, " +"USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"You can find Mageia ISO's <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/" +"downloads/\">here</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:70 +msgid "Classical installation media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:72 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:104 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:171 +msgid "Common features" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:75 +msgid "These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:78 +msgid "" +"They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously " +"installed version of Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:82 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:118 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:174 +msgid "Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen: " +"<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware " +"Detection Tool</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:91 +msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:95 +msgid "" +"You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:102 +msgid "Live media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:107 +msgid "" +"Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install " +"it" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:111 +msgid "The Live media also includes an Installer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:114 +msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:121 +msgid "They contain non-free software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:126 +msgid "Live DVD Plasma" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:129 +msgid "Plasma desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:132 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:146 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:160 +msgid "All available languages are present" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:135 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:149 +msgid "64-bit architecture only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:140 +msgid "Live DVD GNOME" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:143 +msgid "GNOME desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:154 +msgid "Live DVD Xfce" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:157 +msgid "Xfce desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:163 +msgid "32 or 64-bit architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:169 +msgid "Net install media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:177 +msgid "First steps are English language only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:182 +msgid "netinstall.iso" +msgstr "netinstall.iso" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:185 +msgid "" +"Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free " +"software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:191 +msgid "netinstall-nonfree.iso" +msgstr "netinstall-nonfree.iso" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:194 +msgid "" +"Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:202 +msgid "Downloading and Checking Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:204 +msgid "Downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or " +"BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as " +"the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth " +"is too low." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:209 +msgid "" +"If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and " +"<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO " +"integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for " +"use in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:217 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:222 +msgid "In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:225 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:229 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:233 +msgid "Checking the integrity of the downloaded media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:235 +msgid "" +"The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an " +"algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of " +"your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the " +"checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not " +"match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or " +"attempt a repair using BitTorrent." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:241 +msgid "" +"To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need " +"to be root), and:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:245 +msgid "" +"To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:249 +msgid "" +"To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:254 +msgid "" +"To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:258 +msgid "Example:" +msgstr "דוגמה:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:260 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:265 +msgid "" +"then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO " +"checksum provided by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:270 +msgid "Burn or dump the ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:271 +msgid "" +"The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a " +"USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will " +"actually be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:275 +msgid "Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:276 +msgid "" +"Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis> " +"image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or <emphasis>files</" +"emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia wiki</link> for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:282 +msgid "Dump the ISO to a USB stick" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:283 +msgid "" +"All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick " +"and then use that to boot and install the system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:286 +msgid "" +"Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on " +"the device and all existing data will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:290 +msgid "" +"Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia " +"ISO partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:292 +msgid "" +"So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will " +"then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer " +"formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original " +"capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:299 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:300 +msgid "" +"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:303 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Windows" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:304 +msgid "You could try:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:307 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US\">Rufus</link> using the " +"\"ISO image\" option" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:311 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager\">Win32 " +"Disk Imager</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:317 +msgid "Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:319 +msgid "" +"It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting " +"potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:325 +msgid "Open a console" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:328 +msgid "" +"Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command " +"<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:332 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Root.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:338 +msgid "" +"Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open " +"any application or file manager that could access or read it)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:343 +msgid "Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:345 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:351 +msgid "" +"Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example " +"<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:354 +msgid "" +"Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command <command>dmesg</" +"command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can see the device " +"name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case, <filename>sdd</" +"filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its size is 2GB:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><screen> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360 +#, no-wrap +msgid "" +"[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd\n" +"[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000\n" +"[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3\n" +"[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device\n" +"[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash\n" +"[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB\n" +"[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected\n" +"[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0\n" +"[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4\n" +"[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)\n" +"[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off\n" +"[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00\n" +"[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found\n" +"[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through\n" +"[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1\n" +"[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:380 +msgid "" +"Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/" +"sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:382 +msgid "" +"Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg: <filename>/dev/sdd</" +"filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:384 +msgid "" +"Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/" +"sdd bs=1M</literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><tip><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:388 +msgid "" +"It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role=\"bold\">if</emphasis> " +"stands for <emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role=\"bold\">of</emphasis> stands for " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role=\"bold\">f</" +"emphasis>ile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:392 +msgid "Enter the command: <command>sync</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:395 +msgid "This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:3 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other Countries</" +"emphasis> option and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list, " +"after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the " +"main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:45 +msgid "" +"In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method, so users should not need to configure it manually. " +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions " +"and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu> " +"<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running " +"<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:29 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass." +"png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format " +"the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can " +"preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated /" +"home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) partition " +"itself)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:50 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Upgrade</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">שדרוג</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:52 +msgid "Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still " +"supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been " +"thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached " +"its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a <quote>clean</" +"quote> install instead, while preserving your <filename>/home</filename> " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:67 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the " +"language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> " +"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis role=" +"\"bold\"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:14 +msgid "Select Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:24 +msgid "Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia​​." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:27 +msgid "" +"A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based " +"upon your previously selected language and timezone choices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:20 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "מקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis> " +"to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:50 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as " +"though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this " +"and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will " +"be applied." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the " +"Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:34 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "יש לבחור את השפה העיקרית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for " +"your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the " +"installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be " +"installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple " +"languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add " +"extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:58 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your " +"preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked " +"as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:82 +msgid "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is " +"inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed " +"languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:89 +msgid "" +"You can change the language for your system post-installation in the " +"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>System</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>localization for your system</guimenuitem> </" +"menuchoice>." +msgstr "" +"ניתן לשנות את השפה של המערכת שלך אחרי ההתקנה בתוך <menuchoice> <guimenu>מרכז " +"הבקרה של Mageia</guimenu> <guimenuitem>מערכת</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>המקמת המערכת שלך</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:10 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:29 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and " +"USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force evdev</" +"guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work on a " +"mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:7 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:11 +msgid "" +"To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the " +"software <emphasis role=\"bold\">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead " +"(available in the Mageia repositories)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:16 +msgid "" +"For more information, see: <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-" +"efi_and_Mageia\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:15 +msgid "Bootloader" +msgstr "מנהל אתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:18 +msgid "Available Bootloaders" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20 +msgid "Grub2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:22 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:25 +msgid "" +"GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the " +"bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:30 +msgid "" +"By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master " +"Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:39 +msgid "GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:43 +msgid "" +"By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI " +"System Partition)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer " +"(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP " +"created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will " +"be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is " +"required, whatever the number of operating systems you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:55 +msgid "rEFInd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:57 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:59 +msgid "" +"rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed " +"EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:65 +msgid "" +"Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal> " +"option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system " +"architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit " +"machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available " +"to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75 +msgid "Bootloader Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:78 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "הגדרות עיקריות של מנהל האתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:89 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader to use</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:92 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu), " +"can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and " +"<literal>UEFI</literal> systems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu) is an alternative " +"option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:105 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot device</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:107 +msgid "Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:111 +msgid "" +"There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: " +"<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:115 +msgid "" +"When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be " +"listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:122 +msgid "" +"This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating " +"system is started up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:126 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:127 +msgid "" +"This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username " +"and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting " +"entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely " +"to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the " +"password is the one chosen hereafter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:136 +msgid "Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:139 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again)</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set " +"above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:144 en/setupBootloader.xml:250 +msgid "<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:147 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:148 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power " +"management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it " +"could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if " +"you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance " +"random reboots or system lockups)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:156 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:157 +msgid "" +"This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core " +"processors" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:161 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:162 +msgid "" +"Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable " +"Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and " +"Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:168 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:169 +msgid "" +"Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a " +"specific processor in an SMP system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:175 +msgid "Bootloader Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות מנהל אתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:176 +msgid "" +"If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the " +"bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the " +"screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the " +"subsequent screenshot for your options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:181 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:188 +msgid "Your rEFInd configuration options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system partition." +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:195 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install in /EFI/BOOT.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:196 en/setupBootloader.xml:239 +msgid "" +"This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP " +"(EFI System Partition). This can be useful when:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:198 en/setupBootloader.xml:241 +msgid "" +"(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed " +"and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in /EFI/" +"BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:202 en/setupBootloader.xml:245 +msgid "" +"(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written " +"bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:207 +msgid "" +"If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous " +"section, then your bootloader configuration options are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:211 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:220 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Default</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:221 +msgid "The operating system to be started up by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:224 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Append</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:225 +msgid "" +"This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to " +"give you more information as it boots." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:229 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Probe foreign OS</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:230 +msgid "" +"If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to " +"add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, " +"then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:236 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install in /EFI/BOOT. </emphasis>(Note: this menu " +"option only becomes available where the installer detects that a machine is " +"in UEFI mode)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader4.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\" align=" +"\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:261 +msgid "<emphasis>Video mode</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:262 +msgid "" +"This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If " +"you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:267 +msgid "<emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:268 +msgid "" +"Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather " +"chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is " +"missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you " +"understand the implications, and wish to proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:274 +msgid "" +"Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer " +"supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this " +"resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or " +"rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:283 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png\" align=\"center" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:290 +msgid "Other Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות אחרות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:292 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:293 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond " +"the scope of this documentation. However, in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect " +"Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the " +"documentation for the relevant operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:296 +msgid "Installing Without a Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:297 +msgid "" +"While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 " +"Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are " +"doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be " +"unable to start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:10 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39 +msgid "" +"DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older " +"SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use " +"and subsequently fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:44 +msgid "" +"If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which " +"SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) " +"correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/software.xml:4 +msgid "Software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/software.xml:7 +msgid "Media Selection" +msgstr "בחירת מאגר" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:10 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות קול" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:26 +msgid "" +"This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the " +"installer, and this driver should work without problems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:29 +msgid "" +"However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run " +"<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice> " +"<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the " +"<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis> " +"screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice " +"about how to solve the problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:43 +msgid "Advanced" +msgstr "מתקדם" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:10 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography +#. 2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK " +"to erase <emphasis role=\"bold\">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role=\"bold\">all " +"data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:11 +msgid "Testing Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:16 +msgid "Live mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:23 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:30 +msgid "Testing hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:33 +msgid "" +"One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is " +"correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in " +"the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:40 +msgid "network interface: configure it with net_applet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:44 +msgid "graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:49 +msgid "sound: a jingle has already been played" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:53 +msgid "printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:57 +msgid "scanner: scan a document from ..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If " +"not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/testing.xml:66 +msgid "" +"The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to " +"proceed with the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:73 +msgid "Launch installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:76 +msgid "" +"To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, " +"simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live " +"desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link linkend=" +"\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</link> step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:82 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:10 +msgid "Uninstalling Mageia" +msgstr "הסרת Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:18 +msgid "" +"If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short " +"you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the " +"possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:23 +msgid "" +"After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select " +"<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot " +"loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no " +"option to choose your Mageia operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on " +"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control Panel</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Storage</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You " +"will recognise a Mageia partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</" +"literal>, and also by their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each " +"of these partitions and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the " +"space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it " +"(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the " +"existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other " +"partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As always, when " +"changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything important to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/unused.xml:3 +msgid "Keep or delete unused material" +msgstr "" + +#. 2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused " +"hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:18 +msgid "" +"If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on " +"different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files " +"then you might wish to accept this proposal." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:22 +msgid "" +"Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and " +"localization files that will be removed if you proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just " +"take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a " +"blank screen - this is normal." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a097a7a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<book version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="DrakLive-installer" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/19 apb: Disabled setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml because I have included it at the end of setupBootloader.xml--> +<!--2018/03/24 apb: Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml, ask_mntpoint_s.xml, takeOverHdConfirm.xml, diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml because I have grouped them together under diskPartitioning.xml (as per DrakX)--> +<title>התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת + + Mageia.org + + + + March 2016 + + Mageia 5 + + + + + התיעוד הרשמי עבור Mageia + + + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + +
+ התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8dc1649 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + +התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת + + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..188bc54e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + Installation with DrakX + + Mageia.org + + + + פברואר 2014 + + Mageia 4 + + + + + התיעוד הרשמי עבור Mageia + + + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Installation with DrakX + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..288c1bc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + Installation with DrakX + + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1472434 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Installation with DrakX + + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9bb0f4d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,384 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Select and use ISOs + +
+ מבוא + Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose +which image best suits your needs. + There are three types of installation media: + + + Classical installer: Booting with this +media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to +install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice +of which Desktop environment to install. + + + LIVE media: This option allows you to try +out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to +your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can +be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating +system itself. + + The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you +have fewer configuration options. + + + Live ISOs can only be used to create clean installations, +they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases. + + + + Net Install: These are minimal ISO's +containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer +and find DrakX-installer-stage2 and other packages that +are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on +the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet. + These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if +bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a +DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick. + + + More details are given in the next sections. +
+
+ מדיה +
+ Definition + Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to +install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, +USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to. + You can find Mageia ISO's here. +
+
+ Classical installation media +
+ Common features + + + These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX + + + They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously +installed version of Mageia + + + Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures + + + Some tools are available in the Installer Welcome screen: +Rescue System, Memory Test, and Hardware +Detection Tool + + + Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages + + + You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software + + +
+
+
+ Live media +
+ Common features + + + Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install +it + + + The Live media also includes an Installer. + + + Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce) + + + Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures + + + They contain non-free software + + +
+
+ Live DVD Plasma + + + Plasma desktop environment only + + + All available languages are present + + + 64-bit architecture only + + +
+
+ Live DVD GNOME + + + GNOME desktop environment only + + + All available languages are present + + + 64-bit architecture only + + +
+
+ Live DVD Xfce + + + Xfce desktop environment only + + + All available languages are present + + + 32 or 64-bit architectures + + +
+
+
+ Net install media +
+ Common features + + + Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures + + + First steps are English language only + + +
+
+ netinstall.iso + + + Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free +software + + +
+
+ netinstall-nonfree.iso + + + Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it + + +
+
+
+
+ Downloading and Checking Media +
+ Downloading + Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or +BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as +the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth +is too low. + If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums. + + md5sum, sha1sum and +sha512sum (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO +integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for +use in the next section. + + + + + In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open: + + + + Click on Save File, then click OK. +
+
+ Checking the integrity of the downloaded media + The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an +algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of +your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the +checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not +match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or +attempt a repair using BitTorrent. + To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need +to be root), and: + + + To use the md5sum, type: md5sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso + + + To use the sha1sum, type: sha1sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso + + + + To use the sha512sum, type: sha512sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso + + + דוגמה: + + + + + then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO +checksum provided by Mageia. +
+
+
+ Burn or dump the ISO + The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or dumped to a +USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will +actually be created. +
+ Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD + Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an +image is used. Burn data or +files is NOT correct. See the the Mageia +wiki for more information. +
+
+ Dump the ISO to a USB stick + All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick +and then use that to boot and install the system. + + Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on +the device and all existing data will be lost. + + + Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia +ISO partition. + So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will +then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer +formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original +capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick. + +
+ Using a graphical tool within Mageia + You can use a graphical tool like IsoDumper +
+
+ Using a graphical tool within Windows + You could try: + + + Rufus using the +"ISO image" option + + + Win32 Disk +Imager + + +
+
+ Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system + + It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting +potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device. + + + + Open a console + + + Become a root (Administrator) user with the command +su - (don't forget the - ) + + + + + Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open +any application or file manager that could access or read it) + + + Enter the command fdisk -l + + + + + Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example +/dev/sdb in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick. + Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command +dmesg. Towards the end of the following example, you can +see the device name starting with sd, and in this case, +sdd is the actual device. You can also see that its +size is 2GB: + [72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd +[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000 +[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3 +[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device +[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash +[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB +[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected +[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0 +[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4 +[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB) +[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off +[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00 +[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found +[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through +[72595.967251] sdd: sdd1 +[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk + + + Enter the command: dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file +of=/dev/sdX bs=1M + Where X=your device name eg: +/dev/sdd + Example: dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso +of=/dev/sdd bs=1M + + It might be helpful to know that if stands +for input file and of stands +for output file + + + + Enter the command: sync + + + This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick. + + +
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7eba41c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +רישיון והערות שחרור + + + + + +
+ + הסכם רישיון + + + + + Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions +carefully. + + + + These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must +be accepted before you can continue. + + + + To proceed, simply select Accept and then click on +Next + + + + If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your +interest in Mageia. Clicking Quit will reboot your +computer. + + + +
+ +
+ + + הערות שחרור + + + + + Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by +clicking on the Release Notes button. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd835029 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + +
+ + ניהול משתמשים + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + Set Administrator (root) Password: + + + It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a +superuser (Administrator) password, usually called the +root password in Linux. You need to repeat the same +password in the box underneath, to check that the first entry was not +mistyped. + + + As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from +red-to-yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green +shield shows you are using a strong password. + + All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters +(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password. + +
+ +
+ + הזנת פרטי משתמש + + + Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the +superuser (root), but enough to use the Internet, office +applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a +computer for. + + + + סמל + + יש ללחוץ על סמל זה אם ברצונך לשנות את סמל המשתמש + + + + השם האמיתי + + יש להזין את השם האמתי של המשתמש בתיבת טקסט זו + + + + Login Name + + Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real +name. The login name is case-sensitive. + + + The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for +your /home directory. Some user parameters will be +written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as +Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data... + + + + + סיסמה + + Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above). + + Password (again): Retype the user +password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password. + + + + + Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is +both read and write protected (umask=0027) + + You can add any extra needed users in the Configuration - +Summary step during the install. Choose User +management. + + The access permissions can also be changed after the install. + +
+ +
+ + ניהול משתמשים (מתקדם) + + + The Advanced option allows you to edit further settings +for the user you are adding. + + + + Shell: This drop-down list allows you to change the +shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are +Bash, Dash and Sh + + + + User ID: Here you can set the user ID for any user you +added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, +then leave it blank. + + + + Group ID: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if +unsure, leave it blank. + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a78447ee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +
+ + Supplemental Installation Media + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source. +The source selection determines which packages will be available during the +subsequent steps. + + For a network source, there are two steps to follow: + + + + Choosing and activating the network, if not already up. + + + + Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the Nonfree, the +Tainted repositories and the +Updates. With the URL, you can designate a specific +repository or your own NFS installation. + + + + + If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit +packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by +selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only +contains 64-bit and noarch packages, it will not be +able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, +the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e55638d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + +
+ + בחירת נקודות עיגון + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If +you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points +yourself. + + + + To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For +example: sda is a hard drive - and +5 is a partition number, followed +by the (capacity, mount point, filesystem type) of the +partition. + + + + If you have several partitions, you can choose various different +mount points from the drop down menu, such as +/, /home and +/var. You can even make your own mount points, for +instance /video for a partition where you want to store +your films, or perhaps /Data for all your data files. + + + + For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the +mount point field blank. + + + + + If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a / +(root) partition. + + + + If you are not sure what to choose, click Previous to +go back and then tick Custom disk partitioning, where +you can click on a partition to see its type and size. + + + If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on +Next, and choose whether you only want to format the +partition suggested by DrakX, or more. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2518ad44 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +
+ + + + + +Clock Settings + + + + + Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local +time or UTC time. + In the Advanced tab, you can enable automatic time +synchronization and specify an NTP server. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e0d0a8a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Boot Mageia as Live system + +
+ + Booting the medium + + You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug +the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer. + If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need +to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try +accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer +will boot. + + To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try +pressing either F2, Del or +Esc for the BIOS, or Esc, +F8, F10 or F11 for the +boot device menu. These (fairly common) keys are just a selection of +possible options though. + + + The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media +will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or +UEFI type. + +
+
+ + In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode + + + + + + First screen while booting in BIOS mode + + + + Menu + + Boot Mageia + This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB +media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). + Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation. + + + + use non-free video drivers (slower to +boot) + Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers + + + + + Install Mageia + This option will install Mageia to a hard disk. + + + + use non-free video drivers (slower to +boot) + Install Mageia using non-free video drivers + + + + + Memory Test + Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write +operations. Reboot to end the test. + + + F2 Language + Press F2 to have the installer use a specific language +during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then +press Enter. + + +
+
+ + In UEFI mode + + + + + First screen while booting in UEFI mode + + + + Menu + + Boot Mageia + This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB +media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). Once the +boot is done, you can proceed to the installation + + + Install Mageia + This option will install Mageia to a hard disk. + + + F2 Language + Press F2 to have the installer use a specific language +during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then +press Enter. + + + + If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options +duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will +be suffixed with "USB". + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7196b4b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +בחירת שולחן עבודה + + + + + + + Some choices made here will open other screens with related options. + + After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the +installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing +the Details button. + + + + + + + Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop +environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools. + + + + Select Custom if you do not wish to use either (or, +actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software +choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is +lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer +packages installed by default. + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9bfaa4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +
+ + בחירת קבוצת חבילות לפי נושא + + + + + + + + + + + + Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on +your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however +more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which +become visible as the mouse is hovered over them. + + + + Workstation + + + + Server + + + + סביבה גרפית + + + + Individual Package Selection: you can use +this option to manually add or remove packages + + + + See for instructions on how to do a +minimal install (without or with X & IceWM). +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dae984e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +
+ + Choose Individual Packages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your +installation. + + After having made your choice, you can click on the +floppy icon at the bottom of the page to save your +choice of packages (saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this +file to install the same packages on another system, by pressing the same +button during install and choosing to load it. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5cd725cf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +
+ + Configure your Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system. + + + + Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The +settings DrakX chose are usually good. + + + + If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info +box below. + + + + Only change things when you know very well what you are doing. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd2db509 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +
+ + Configure your Timezone + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the +same timezone. + + + + In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time +or to GMT, also known as UTC. + + + If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they +are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e62f5a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card) + + + + + + DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device. + + If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: + + יצרן + + + + then the make of your card + + + + and the model of card + + + + If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +Xorg category, which provides more than 40 generic and +open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver +for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides +basic capabilities. + + + Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the Command Line Interface + + + Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the Nonfree repository and in +some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The +Nonfree repository needs to be explicitly enabled to +access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after +your first reboot. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..05b66cb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration + + + + + + No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) +you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user +interface system called X Window System, or simply +X. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other +graphical environment to work well, the following X settings +need to be correct. + + Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are +incorrect, or if none are shown. + + + + Graphics Card + + If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable +list. See . + + + + צג + + You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the +Vendor or Generic lists. Choose +Custom if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and +vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See . + + + + רזולוציה + + The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here. + + + + בדיקה + + The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is +there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your +settings are correct. If you answer Yes, the settings +will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration +screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is +satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your +settings are on the safe side. + + + + אפשרויות + + Here you can choose to enable or disable various options. + + + + + There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are +outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT +displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally +enter standby mode. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7c47756 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Choosing your Monitor + + + DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours. + + + Selecting a monitor with different characteristics +could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something +without knowing what you are doing. If in doubt you should +consult your monitor documentation. + + + + + + + + התאמה אישית + + + This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed. + + It is VERY IMPORTANT that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation. + + + + + הכנס-הפעל + + + This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor +type from the monitor database. + + + + + יצרן + + + If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting: + + + + + + + Manufacturer + + + + דגם הצג + + + + + + כללי + + + Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such +as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. +This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA +card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined +automatically. Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your +selections. + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..544d163e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +
+ + + +חלוקה למחיצות + + + + + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80144aae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake + + + + + + + + + Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, +change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details +before you start. + + + + There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage +device, like a USB key), for example: sda, +sdb, sdc etc. + + + + For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, +or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe +it. Expert mode provides more options such as to label +(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type. + + + + Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click +Done when you're ready. + + + + + + + Take care with the Clear all option, use it only if you +are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device. + + + + If you wish to use encryption on your / partition you +must ensure that you have a separate /boot +partition. The encryption option for the /boot +partition must NOT be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable. + + + + + + + + If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System +Partition) is present and correctly mounted on +/boot/EFI. See Figure 1 below. + + + + If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot +partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below. + + + + +
+ EFI System Partition + + + +
+ +
+ BIOS boot partition + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28fdc127 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Suggested Partitioning + + + In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the +DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia. + + The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to +the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s). + + + + + + אפשרויות ראשיות + + + Use Existing Partitions + + If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have +been found and may be used for the installation. + + + + Use Free Space + + If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for +your new Mageia installation. + + + + Use Free Space on a Windows Partition + + If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may +offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia +installation but see the warning below. + + With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in +light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their +intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by +clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following +screenshot: + + + + This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is +a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important +files before proceeding. + + + + The partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down +correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, +although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been +moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia. + + + + + Erase and use Entire Disk + + This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia + + + This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you +intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data +on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option. + + + + + Custom Disk Partitioning + + This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your +hard drive(s). + + + + If you are not using the Custom disk partitioning +option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to +the following rules: + + + + If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is +created. This will be the / (root) partition. + + + + If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions +are created + + + + 6/19 of the total available place is allocated to / +with a maximum of 50 GB + + + + 1/19 is allocated to swap with a maximum of 4 GB + + + + the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to /home + + + + + + This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will +create three partitions: + + + + 50 GB for / + + + + 4 GB for swap + + + + and the remainder for /home + + + + + If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be +automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted +on /boot/EFI. The Custom disk +partitioning option is the only one that allows to check it has +been correctly done. + + If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned +disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already +exist. It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with +the Installer, under Custom disk partitioning, like any +other partition. Be sure to select BIOS boot partition for +filesystem type. + + See for information on how to proceed. + + + + + + + + + + Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the +partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a +drive. + + Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a +device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an +alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following +settings: + + + + Align to = MiB + + + + Free space preceding (MiB) = 2 + + + + Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e0f9f24 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +
+ + ברכות + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to +remove the installation medium and reboot your computer. + + After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating +system to start (if there are more than one on your computer). + + If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install +will be automatically selected and started. + + Enjoy! + + Visit www.mageia.org/en/ +if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f6d0f54e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + +חומת אש + + + This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they +determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the +target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the +system to be accessible from the Internet. + + + + + + In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is +accessible from the network. The Everything (no +firewall) option enables access to all services of the machine - +an option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer +since it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in +the context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) +for temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and +debugging purposes. + + All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will +enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible +from the network. + + מתקדם + + The Advanced option opens a window where you can enable +a series of services by typing a list of couples (blank +separated) + + <port-number>/<protocol> + + + - <port-number> is the value of the port assigned +to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as +defined in RFC-433; + + - <protocol> is one of TCP +or UDP - the internet protocol that is used by the +service. + + + For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore +is 873/tcp. + + In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 +couples for the same port. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e64b7eb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + +
+ + Formatting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on +partitions not marked for formatting will be preserved. + + Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted. + + Click on Advanced to choose the partitions you want to +check for so-called bad blocks + + + If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on +Previous, again on Previous and +then on Custom to get back to the main screen, where +you can choose to view details of your partitions. + + + When you are confident about the selections, click on +Next to continue. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee807d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + +
+ + + + +Graphical Configuration + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65f4b8b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +עדכונים + + + + + + + + Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been +updated or improved. + + + + Select Yes if you wish to download and install them + + + + Select No if you don't want to do this now, or if you +aren't connected to the Internet + + + + יש ללחוץ על קדימה להמשך + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03732c76 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +DrakX, כלי ההתקנה של Mageia + + + Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia +Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as +possible. + +
+ צעדי ההתקנה + + + + The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which +is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen. + + + + Each step has one or more screens, which may also have +Advanced sections with extra, less commonly required +options. + + + + Most screens have Help buttons for further details +about the particular step. + + + + + If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it +is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a +partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your +computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well +leave you with an unusable system. + + If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a +text terminal by pressing the keys Ctrl +Alt F2 together. After that, +press Ctrl Alt +Delete together to reboot. + +
+ +
+ מסך קבלת הפנים של ההתקנה + + The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the +Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of +the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type. + + The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will +start the installer, and is normally all that you will need. + +
+ Legacy (BIOS) Systems + + + + + + + Menu + + + Install Mageia + + Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will +automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected. + + + + Rescue System + + This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing +Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader. + + + + Memory Test + + Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write +operations. Reboot to end the test. + + + + F2: שפה + + יש ללחוץ על F2 להצגת שפות חלופיות. + + +
+ +
+ מערכות UEFI + + From this screen, you can access options by pressing e to +enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press Esc +to quit without saving or press F10 to save and quit. + + + + + + + Menu + + + Install: Start the Install process + + + + Rescue: This option allows you to either +re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use +it to restore a Windows bootloader. + + + + F2: שפה: יש ללחוץ על F2 +להצגת שפות חלופיות. + + + + If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, +and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with "USB". +
+
+ +
+ Installation Problems and Possible Solutions + +
+ אין ממשק גרפי + + + + After the initial screen you did not progress to the Language +Selection screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and +older systems. Try using low resolution by typing vgalo +at the prompt. + + + + If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be +possible. In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use +this press Esc at the Welcome screen +and confirm with ENTER. You will be presented with a black +screen with a boot: prompt. Type text +and press ENTER to continue with the installation in text +mode. + + +
+ +
+ The Install Freezes + + If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a +problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware +detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type +noauto at the prompt. This option may also be combined +with other parameters as necessary. +
+ +
+ RAM problem + + This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the +available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the +mem=xxxM parameter, where +xxx is the correct amount of +RAM. e.g. mem=256M would specify 256MB of RAM. +
+ +
+ Dynamic partitions + + If you converted your hard disk from Basic format to +Dynamic format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not +possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a +Basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx. +
+
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93218cfd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + +
+ Locale + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbeff33f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +
+ + + +Login Screen + + + + + SDDM login screen + + + Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen. + Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find +yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live +medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia +installation. + You can find further documentation in the +Mageia wiki. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c22e8f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + +
+ + Available Media + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps. + + + + The Core repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution. + + + + The Nonfree repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc. + + + + The Tainted repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc. + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d20c509 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +
+ + + + + + + Minimal Install + + + + + + + + + + + + + Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for +Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use +this option combined with the Individual package +selection option to fine-tune your installation. See . + + + + You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting +everything in the Package Group Selection screen, see +. + + If desired, you can additionally tick the Individual package +selection option in the same screen. + + + + If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see +screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as +documentation and X. + + If the With X option is selected, then IceWM (a +lightweight desktop environment) will also be included. + + + + The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and +info pages. It contains the man pages from the Linux Documentation +Project and the GNU +coreutils info pages. + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..411c4d4b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +
+ + Configuration Summary + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on +the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the +settings here and change them if you want by pressing +Configure. + + + As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings +unless: + + there are known issues with a default setting + + + + the default setting has already been tried and it fails + + + + some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue + + + + +
+ + System parameters + + + + + Timezone + + DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You +can change it if needed. See also + + + + Country / Region + + If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the +setting. See + + + + Bootloader + + DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting + + Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more +information, see + + + + + + + User management + + You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own +/home directories. + + + + Services + + System services refer to those small programs which run in the background +(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes. + + You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may +prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see + + + +
+ +
+ + Hardware parameters + + + + + מקלדת + + Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type +of keyboard. + + + If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind +that your passwords are going to change too. + + + + + Mouse + + Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs +etc. + + + + Sound card + + The installer will use the default driver if one is available. + + If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other +possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, +but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you +can click on Advanced to manually specify a driver. + + + + Graphical interface + + This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For +more information, see + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + Network and Internet parameters + + + + + Network + + You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free +drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control +Center, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media +repositories. + + + When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor +that interface as well. + + + + + Proxies + + A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider +Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a +proxy service. + + You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters +you need to enter here. + + +
+ +
+ + הגדרות אבטחה + + + + + Security Level + + The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting +(Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits +your usage. + + + + Firewall + + The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on +your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound +connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your +computer normally. + + Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are +continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly +safe connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as +covert data channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons. + + למידע נוסף, נא לראות . + + + Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may +be very risky. + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ab8d929 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +
+ + + + הפעלה מחדש + + + + Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your +computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer. + + Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the +same order. + + + + + When you are ready, press Finish. + When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These +indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see +Software Management). + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22db7045 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + +שינוי גודל מחיצת +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> + + + You have more than one +Windows® partition. +Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing +Mageia. + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06db666c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + +
+ + סף האבטחה המבוקש: + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Please choose the desired security level + + Standard is the default, and recommended setting for +the average user. + + Secure will create a highly protected system - for +instance if the system is to be used as a public server. + + Security Administrator + + This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will +send security alert messages when it detects situations +which require notification to a system administrator. + + A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - +where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages. + + + The system sends such messages as Unix Mailspool +messages, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore +be configured for receiving such mail! + + + It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in +the Security section of the Mageia Control Center. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f42e94bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +
+ + Select your Country / Region + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, +like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country +can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network. + + + + If your country isn't in the list, click the Other +Countries option and choose your country / region there. + + + + + If your country is only in the Other Countries list, +after clicking OK it may seem that a country from the +main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice. + + +
+ + Input method + + + In the Other Countries screen you can also select an +input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input +multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the +default input method, so users should not need to configure it +manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar +functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package +selection. + + + If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it +post-install via Configure your Computer +System , or by running +localedrake as root. + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0989dc9d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Install or Upgrade + + + + + + + + Install + + Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format +the root partition (/), but can +preserve a pre-existing /home partition (a dedicated +/home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) +partition itself). + + + + שדרוג + + Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia. + + + + + Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was still +supported when this Installer's version was released, has been +thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached +its End Of Life then it is better to do a +clean install instead, while preserving your +/home partition. + + + + If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you +can return from the Install or Upgrade screen to the +language choice screen by pressing Ctrl +Alt Home . Do NOT do this later in the install. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..740c7362 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +מקלדת + + + DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable +keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout. + + + + + + + + Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard +layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the +specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There +may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also +look here: en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout + + + + If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on More +to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there. + + + After choosing a keyboard from the More dialogue, +you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as +though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this +and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will +be applied. + + + + + If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an +extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the +Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92582a2b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + +Select Keyboard + + + + + + Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia​​. + + A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based +upon your previously selected language and timezone choices. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d92d090a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +יש לבחור את השפה העיקרית + + + + + Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your +continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for +your installed system. + + + + Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the +installation and for your installed system. + + + + If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be +installed on your system, then you should use the Multiple +languages option to add them now. It will be difficult to add +extra language support after installation. + + + + + + + + Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your +preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked +as chosen in the Multiple languages screen. + + + + + If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then +it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well + + + + Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the +Multiple languages screen if you know that it is +inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed +languages. + + + + ניתן לשנות את השפה של המערכת שלך אחרי ההתקנה בתוך מרכז +הבקרה של Mageia מערכת +המקמת המערכת שלך + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..714a20f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + +
+ + Select mouse + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a +different one here. + + Usually, Universal Any PS/2 and +USB mice is a good choice. + + Select Universal Force +evdev to configure the buttons that do not work +on a mouse with six or more buttons. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27cdb8d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +מנהל אתחול + +
+ Available Bootloaders +
+ Grub2 + + Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems + + GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the +bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system. + + + By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master +Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition. + + + + Grub2-efi on UEFI systems + + GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system. + + + By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI +System Partition). + If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer +(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP +created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will +be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is +required, whatever the number of operating systems you have. + + +
+
+ rEFInd + + rEFInd on UEFI systems + + rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed +EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/ + + + + Please note that in order to be able to use the rEFInd +option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system +architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit +machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available +to you. + +
+
+
+ + Bootloader Setup + +
+ הגדרות עיקריות של מנהל האתחול + + + + + + Bootloader to use + + + GRUB2 (with either a graphical or a text menu), +can be chosen for both Legacy MBR/BIOS systems and +UEFI systems. + + + rEFInd (with a graphical menu) is an alternative +option solely for use with UEFI systems. + + + + + Boot device + + Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing. + + + There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: +sda1), as this method is considered unreliable. + + When using UEFI mode, then the Boot device will be +listed as EFI System Partition. + + + Delay before booting the default image + This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating +system is started up. + + + Security + This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username +and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting +entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely +to have a need for it. The username is root and the +password is the one chosen hereafter. + + + סיסמה + Choose a password for the bootloader (optional) + + + Password (again) + Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set +above + + + Advanced + + + Enable ACPI + ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power +management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it +could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if +you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance +random reboots or system lockups). + + + Enable SMP + This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core +processors + + + Enable APIC + Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable +Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and +Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management. + + + Enable Local APIC + Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a +specific processor in an SMP system + + +
+
+ הגדרות מנהל אתחול + If, in the previous section you selected rEFInd as the +bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the +screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the +subsequent screenshot for your options. + + + Your rEFInd configuration options: + + + Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system +partition. + + + Install in /EFI/BOOT. + This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP +(EFI System Partition). This can be useful when: + (a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed +and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in +/EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive. + (b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written +bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation. + + + If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous +section, then your bootloader configuration options are shown below: + + + + + Default + The operating system to be started up by default. + + + Append + This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to +give you more information as it boots. + + + Probe foreign OS + If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to +add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, +then untick the Probe Foreign OS option. + + + Install in /EFI/BOOT. (Note: this menu +option only becomes available where the installer detects that a machine is +in UEFI mode). + This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP +(EFI System Partition). This can be useful when: + (a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed +and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in +/EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive. + (b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written +bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation. + + + Advanced + + + + + + Video mode + This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If +you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth +options. + + + Do not touch ESP or MBR + Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather +chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is +missing. Click Ok only if you are sure you +understand the implications, and wish to proceed. + + Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer +supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this +resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or +rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk! + + + + + +
+
+
+ אפשרויות אחרות +
+ Using an existing bootloader + The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond +the scope of this documentation. However, in most cases it will involve +running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect +Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the +documentation for the relevant operating system. +
+
+ Installing Without a Bootloader + While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 +Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are +doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be +unable to start. +
+ +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09fc8060 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +
+ + + + +Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry + + + To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the +software grub-customizer tool instead +(available in the Mageia repositories). + + + For more information, see: https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7778c15f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +
+ + Setup SCSI + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older +SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use +and subsequently fail to recognise the drive. + + If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which +SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) +correctly. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7406ea3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +
+ + + +Software + +
+ בחירת מאגר + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0c4a356 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + +
+ + הגדרות קול + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the +installer, and this driver should work without problems. + + However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run +draksound or start this tool via +Mageia Control Center Hardware +Sound Configuration . Then, in the +draksound or Sound Configuration +screen, click on Troubleshooting to find useful advice +about how to solve the problem. + +
+ + מתקדם + + + If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other +possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, +but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you +can click on Advanced to manually specify a driver. +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bd2f98f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +
+ + Confirm hard disk to be formatted + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Click on Previous if you are at all unsure about your +choice. + + + + Click on Next to proceed if you are sure that it is OK +to erase every partition, every operating system and all +data that might be on that hard disk. + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e187f383 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + +
+ + + + +Testing Mageia as Live system + + +
+ + Live mode + + + This is the screen you will see if you selected the Boot Mageia option from the Live media menu. + + + + +
+ + Testing hardware + + + One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is +correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in +the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center: + + + + network interface: configure it with net_applet + + + + graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK. + + + + sound: a jingle has already been played + + + + printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page + + + + scanner: scan a document from ... + + + + If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If +not, you can use the Quit button to exit. + + + The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to +proceed with the installation. + +
+ +
+ + Launch installation + + + To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, +simply click the Install on Hard Disk icon on the Live +desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the Partitioning step. + + + + +
+
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a15c43fd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + +
+ + + + הסרת Mageia + + + + + + + If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short +you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the +possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system. + + After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select +Rescue system, then Restore Windows boot +loader. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no +option to choose your Mageia operating system. + + In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on + Start Control +Panel Administrative Tools +Computer Management +Storage Disk +Management . You will recognise a Mageia +partition because they are labeled Unknown, and also by +their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each of these partitions +and select Delete to free up the space. + + If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it +(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter. + + If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the +existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other +partitioning tools that can be used, such as gparted, available for both Windows and Linux. As +always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything +important to you. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4374ff89 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +
+ + Keep or delete unused material + + + + + + + + + In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused +hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them. + + If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on +different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files +then you might wish to accept this proposal. + + Clicking Advanced will list the unused hardware and +localization files that will be removed if you proceed. + + + + + + The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just +take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a +blank screen - this is normal. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e1a0d78 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po @@ -0,0 +1,9609 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Control Center Help package. +# +# Translators: +# Omer I.S., 2020 +# Yaron Shahrabani , 2020 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-09-08 15:28+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-11-06 09:07+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Omer I.S.\n" +"Language-Team: Hebrew (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/language/" +"he/)\n" +"Language: he\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n == 1 && n % 1 == 0) ? 0 : (n == 2 && n % " +"1 == 0) ? 1: (n % 10 == 0 && n % 1 == 0 && n > 10) ? 2 : 3;\n" + +#. type: Content of:
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11 +msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories" +msgstr "גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של WebDAV" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --dav" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:19 +msgid "diskdrake--dav1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure " +"WebDAV shares</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21 +#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:20 +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:18 en/draksambashare.xml:18 en/drakvpn.xml:16 +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:27 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:41 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:27 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:46 +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:17 en/system-config-printer.xml:21 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "מבוא" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a " +"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it " +"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a " +"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV " +"server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40 +msgid "Creating a new entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if " +"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. " +"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue " +"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking " +"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the " +"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct " +"it, if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:54 +msgid "diskdrake--dav3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58 +msgid "" +"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount " +"point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61 +msgid "" +"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other " +"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--dav4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the " +"access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74 +msgid "" +"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</" +"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your new mount point is " +"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked whether " +"or not to save the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose " +"this option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. " +"If your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:12 +msgid "Share your hard disk partitions" +msgstr "שיתוף מחיצות הכונן שלך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +msgid "diskdrake --fileshare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20 +msgid "diskdrake--fileshare.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:26 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:25 +msgid "" +"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the " +"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home " +"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have " +"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled " +"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:36 +msgid "" +"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to " +"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No " +"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on " +"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on " +"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for " +"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their " +"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically " +"created by the system. You will be asked about this later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you " +"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. " +"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on " +"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both " +"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any " +"required packages will be installed if necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In " +"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows " +"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare " +"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, " +"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the " +"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information " +"about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:61 +msgid "" +"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and " +"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:66 +msgid "" +"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her " +"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers " +"have this facility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/MCC-cover.xml:9 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/MCC.xml:1 +#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "he" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3 +msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories" +msgstr "גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --nfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:11 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17 +msgid "." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix " +"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. " +"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a " +"user with tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38 +msgid "Procedure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers " +"which share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the " +"shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:47 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51 +msgid "" +"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have " +"to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:56 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and " +"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After " +"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:73 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77 +msgid "" +"On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, " +"a message will displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab " +"modifications\". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the " +"network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file " +"browser, for example in Dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:85 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3 +msgid "CD/DVD burner" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:5 +msgid "diskdrake --removable" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:10 +msgid "diskdrake--removable.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is found under the tab " +"Local disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your " +"removable hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:20 +msgid "Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:22 +msgid "" +"At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and " +"the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change them. " +"Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:28 +msgid "Mount point" +msgstr "נקודת עיגון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:37 en/harddrake2.xml:66 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:45 +msgid "user/nouser" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:47 +msgid "" +"user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this " +"option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is " +"the only one who can umount it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11 +msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories" +msgstr "גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפים של Windows (סמבה)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --smb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) " +"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared " +"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with " +"tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of " +"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who " +"share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the " +"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you " +"have to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:52 +msgid "diskdrake--smb2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount " +"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the " +"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60 +msgid "" +"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to " +"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it " +"with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:66 +msgid "diskdrake--smb3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:72 +msgid "diskdrake--smb4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask " +"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow " +"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The " +"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:84 +msgid "diskdrake--smb5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:3 +msgid "3D Desktop Effects" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drak3d.xml:5 +msgid "drak3d" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:10 +msgid "drak3d.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D " +"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by " +"default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:25 +msgid "Getting Started" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:27 +msgid "" +"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the " +"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can " +"start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:31 +msgid "" +"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you " +"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or " +"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/" +"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your " +"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of " +"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be " +"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</" +"guibutton> button to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:45 +msgid "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz " +"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in " +"for the changes to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:53 +msgid "" +"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz " +"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:59 +msgid "Troubleshooting" +msgstr "פתרון בעיות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:62 +msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop " +"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in " +"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:71 +msgid "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:75 +msgid "" +"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be " +"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login " +"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the " +"log in problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakauth.xml:9 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "אימות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakauth.xml:11 +msgid "drakauth" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakauth.xml:16 +msgid "drakauth.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the " +"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:25 +msgid "" +"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your " +"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so " +"and give information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:3 +msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in" +msgstr "הגדרת כניסה אוטומטית לחשבון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:6 +msgid "drakautologin" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:11 +msgid "drakautologin.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakautologin</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to " +"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without " +"asking for any password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good " +"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:22 +msgid "" +"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the " +"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:26 +msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</" +"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If " +"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible " +"to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by launching the " +"command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either " +"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to " +"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check " +"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if " +"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default " +"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakboot.xml:3 +msgid "Set up boot system" +msgstr "הגדרת אתחול המערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakboot.xml:5 +msgid "drakboot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:10 +msgid "drakboot--boot.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is " +"slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition " +"(ESP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:20 +msgid "drakboot--boot2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default " +"boot, etc.)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled \"Set up " +"boot system\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing " +"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if " +"using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, " +"Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question " +"of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the " +"<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you " +"are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any " +"modification can prevent your machine from booting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:46 +msgid "" +"In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is " +"installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common " +"to all operating systems installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:50 +msgid "" +"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set " +"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. " +"During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating " +"systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is made, the " +"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:57 +msgid "" +"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is " +"possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and " +"password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change " +"settings. The username is \"root\" and the password is the one chosen here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:63 +msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:66 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:68 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the " +"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was " +"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI " +"compatible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:73 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:75 +msgid "" +"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for " +"multicore processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual " +"processor and enable SMP." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</" +"guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:86 +msgid "" +"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two " +"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O " +"APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses " +"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful " +"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC " +"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message " +"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local " +"APIC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:97 +msgid "drakboot1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:101 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot " +"loader you chose." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:106 +msgid "You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:108 +msgid "" +"In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot " +"time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu " +"entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you " +"click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> " +"buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or " +"to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be " +"able to use these tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:118 +msgid "drakboot2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:122 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want " +"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For " +"example: Mageia3." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:126 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches " +"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:129 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the " +"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:133 en/drakboot.xml:160 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to " +"the kernel at boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this " +"entry by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:139 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> " +"file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref linkend=" +"\"draknetprofile\"/>, in the drop-down lists." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:147 +msgid "" +"You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in " +"Legacy mode and UEFI mode):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:150 +msgid "" +"In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> " +"displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:156 +msgid "drakboot3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:163 +msgid "" +"If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them " +"to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box " +"<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:167 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable " +"Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not " +"touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:175 +msgid "drakboot6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:180 +msgid "" +"Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable " +"unless chain loaded from another OS." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:184 +msgid "" +"To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub " +"Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:190 +msgid "drakboot4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:11 +msgid "Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:12 +msgid "drakbug_report" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by " +"doing <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, " +"but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be " +"several GBs large." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing " +"the unneeded parts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:26 +msgid "This command collects the following information on your system:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:29 +msgid "lspci" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:30 +msgid "pci_devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:31 +msgid "dmidecode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:32 +msgid "fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:33 +msgid "scsi" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:34 +msgid "/sys/bus/scsi/devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:35 +msgid "lsmod" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:36 +msgid "cmdline" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:37 +msgid "pcmcia: stab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:38 +msgid "usb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:39 +msgid "partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:40 +msgid "cpuinfo" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:41 +msgid "syslog" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:42 +msgid "Xorg.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:43 +msgid "monitor_full_edid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:44 +msgid "stage1.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:45 +msgid "ddebug.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:46 +msgid "install.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:47 +msgid "fstab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:48 +msgid "modprobe.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:49 +msgid "lilo.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:50 +msgid "grub: menu.lst" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:51 +msgid "grub: install.sh" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:52 +msgid "grub: device.map" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:53 +msgid "xorg.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:54 +msgid "urpmi.cfg" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:55 +msgid "modprobe.preload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:56 +msgid "sysconfig/i18n" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:57 +msgid "/proc/iomem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:58 +msgid "/proc/ioport" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:59 +msgid "mageia version" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:60 +msgid "rpm -qa" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:61 +msgid "df" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the time this help page was written, the \"syslog\" part of this " +"command's output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to " +"our switch to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the \"syslog\" " +"by doing (as root) <emphasis role=\"bold\"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</" +"emphasis>. If you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take " +"the last 5000 lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">journalctl -a | tail -n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "Mageia Bug Report Tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "drakbug" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakbug.xml:15 +msgid "drakbug.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Usually, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> starts " +"automatically when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, " +"after filing a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of " +"the information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:21 +msgid "" +"If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, " +"then please read <link xlink:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"How_to_report_a_bug_properly\">How to report a bug report properly</link> " +"before clicking on the \"Report\" button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:23 +msgid "" +"In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message " +"that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to " +"that existing report that you saw the bug, too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakclock.xml:3 +msgid "Manage date and time" +msgstr "ניהול תאריך ושעה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakclock.xml:5 +msgid "drakclock" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakclock.xml:10 +msgid "drakclock.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab " +"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time" +"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right " +"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:21 +msgid "It's a very simple tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:23 +msgid "" +"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. " +"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on " +"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month " +"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or " +"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:29 +msgid "" +"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</" +"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by " +"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time " +"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:34 +msgid "" +"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's " +"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, " +"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows " +"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see " +"your desktop environment settings for that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:40 +msgid "" +"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the " +"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the " +"nearest town." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they " +"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation " +"settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "Remove a connection" +msgstr "הסרת חיבור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "drakconnect --del" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:8 +msgid "drakconnect--del.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then " +"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted " +"successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)" +msgstr "הגדרת מנשק רשת חדש (LAN, ISDN, ADSL ...)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:6 +msgid "drakconnect" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:11 +msgid "drakconnect.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much " +"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from " +"your access provider or your network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware " +"and provider you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:30 +msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162 +msgid "" +"The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one " +"to configure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167 +msgid "" +"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557 +msgid "Automatic IP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:62 +msgid "drakconnect5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572 +msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576 +msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581 +msgid "the DHCP client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585 +msgid "DHCP timeout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594 +msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599 +msgid "" +"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server " +"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. " +"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241 +msgid "" +"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection " +"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615 +msgid "Manual configuration" +msgstr "הגדרה ידנית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:115 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS " +"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no " +"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service " +"provider's website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:126 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need " +"this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:136 +msgid "drakconnect30.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:780 +msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:150 +msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:91 +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:95 en/draknetcenter.xml:138 +msgid "" +"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:158 +msgid "A new Cable modem connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:172 +msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:176 +msgid "None" +msgstr "כלום" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:180 +msgid "" +"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name " +"and password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers " +"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME " +"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:263 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not " +"need this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:273 +msgid "drakconnect32.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:287 +msgid "A new DSL connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:291 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380 +msgid "Select one of the protocols available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:307 +msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)" +msgstr "פרוטוקול הגדרת מארח באופן דינמי (DHCP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:311 +msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration" +msgstr "הגדרה ידנית של TCP/IP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:315 +msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:319 +msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" +msgstr "PPP מעל תשתית Ethernet (PPPoE)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:323 +msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)" +msgstr "פרוטוקול ערוץ נקודה לנקודה (PPTP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:329 +msgid "Access settings" +msgstr "הגדרות גישה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678 +msgid "Account Login (user name)" +msgstr "שם משתמש (כניסה לחשבון)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682 +msgid "Account password" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:341 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:345 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:357 +msgid "A new ISDN connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706 +msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:365 +msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:369 +msgid "External ISDN modem" +msgstr "מודם ISDN חיצוני" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:375 +msgid "" +"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. " +"Select your card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:384 +msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:389 +msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:395 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is " +"asked for parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:402 +msgid "Connection name" +msgstr "שם התחברות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:406 +msgid "Phone number" +msgstr "מספר טלפון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:410 +msgid "Login ID" +msgstr "שם משתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:418 +msgid "Authentication method" +msgstr "שיטת אימות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:424 +msgid "" +"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or " +"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:430 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by " +"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to " +"put:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:436 +msgid "Domain name" +msgstr "שם מתחם" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:440 +msgid "First and second DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:444 +msgid "" +"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you " +"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:452 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic " +"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the " +"IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:464 +msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:468 +msgid "" +"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for " +"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper " +"only if the other configuration methods did not work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:475 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that " +"the card has detected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:480 +msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:484 +msgid "drakconnect31.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:490 +msgid "Operating mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:494 +msgid "Managed" +msgstr "מנוהל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:497 +msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:503 +msgid "Ad-Hoc" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:506 +msgid "To configure direct connection between computers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:514 +msgid "Network Name (ESSID)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:518 +msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:523 +msgid "WPA/WPA2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:526 +msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:532 +msgid "WEP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:535 +msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:543 +msgid "Encryption key" +msgstr "מפתח הצפנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:545 +msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:552 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a " +"manual IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:561 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are " +"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. " +"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of " +"the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name " +"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be " +"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from " +"DHCP server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:589 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:608 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all " +"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:619 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:625 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers " +"website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:630 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the " +"period." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:644 +msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:648 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:653 +msgid "The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:658 +msgid "" +"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option " +"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:670 +msgid "Provide access settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:674 +msgid "Access Point Name" +msgstr "שם נקודת גישה (Access Point)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:694 +msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:702 +msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:710 +msgid "Manual choice" +msgstr "בחירה ידנית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:714 +msgid "Detected hardware, if any." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:720 +msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:724 +msgid "" +"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package " +"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:729 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked " +"for Dialup options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:736 +msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:740 +msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:744 +msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:748 +msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:752 +msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:756 +msgid "PAP/CHAP" +msgstr "PAP/CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:760 +msgid "Script-based" +msgstr "מבוסס תסריט (סקריפט)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:764 +msgid "PAP" +msgstr "PAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:768 +msgid "Terminal-based" +msgstr "מבוסס-מסוף" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:772 +msgid "CHAP" +msgstr "CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:786 +msgid "Ending the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:788 +msgid "In the next step, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:792 +msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:796 +msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:800 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:804 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:809 +msgid "" +"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow " +"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch " +"automatically between access point according to the signal strength." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:816 +msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:820 +msgid "Metric (10 by default)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:824 +msgid "MTU" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:828 +msgid "Network Hotplugging" +msgstr "חיבור \"חם\" לרשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:832 +msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel" +msgstr "אפשור tunnel מ-IPv6 ל-IPv4" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:836 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start " +"immediately or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:841 +msgid "drakconnect9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:3 +msgid "Open a console as administrator" +msgstr "פתיחת מסוף כמנהל המערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:5 +msgid "drakconsole" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:10 +msgid "drakconsole.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a " +"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more " +"information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:5 +msgid "Manage disk partitions" +msgstr "ניהול מחיצות הכונן" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:7 +msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:12 +msgid "drakdiskBackup.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> " +"as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny " +"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a " +"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll " +"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</" +"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you " +"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:32 +msgid "drakdisk.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:36 +msgid "" +"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your " +"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, " +"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a " +"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</" +"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, " +"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called \"EFI " +"System Partition\" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it " +"contains all your different operating systems bootloaders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot " +"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition " +"must be unmounted first." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:56 +msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:58 +msgid "" +"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to " +"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button " +"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part " +"is selected" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:63 +msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:68 +msgid "drakdiskMountedPartition.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> " +"gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be " +"seen in the screenshot below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:78 +msgid "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakedm.xml:4 +msgid "Set up display manager" +msgstr "הגדרת מנהל ההפעלה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakedm.xml:5 +msgid "drakedm" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakedm.xml:9 +msgid "drakedm.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display " +"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available " +"on your system will be shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. " +"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a " +"lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3 +msgid "Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "הגדרת חומת־האש האישית שלך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5 +msgid "drakfirewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:10 +msgid "drakfirewall.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal " +"firewall\". It is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system " +"security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20 +msgid "" +"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming " +"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the " +"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection " +"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - " +"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable " +"the firewall, and only check the needed services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27 +msgid "" +"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on " +"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field " +"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these " +"examples :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32 +msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34 +msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37 +msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is " +"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:44 +msgid "drakfirewall2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) " +"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even " +"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature " +"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box " +"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second " +"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure " +"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards " +"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot " +"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be " +"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64 +msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:69 +msgid "drakfirewall3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:75 +msgid "drakfirewall4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the " +"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary " +"packages are downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & " +"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfont.xml:3 +msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts" +msgstr "ניהול, הוספה והסרת גופנים. ייבוא גופני חלונות (שם רשום)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfont.xml:6 +msgid "drakfont" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfont.xml:11 +msgid "drakfont.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It " +"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen " +"above shows:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:22 +msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:26 +msgid "a preview of the selected font." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:30 +msgid "some buttons explained here later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You " +"must have Microsoft Windows installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:43 +msgid "" +"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able " +"to use the fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">הסרה:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:48 +msgid "" +"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be " +"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the " +"documents that use them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:52 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">ייבוא:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The " +"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the " +"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when " +"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont " +"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:3 +msgid "Parental Controls" +msgstr "בקרת הורים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakguard.xml:5 +msgid "drakguard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakguard.xml:10 +msgid "drakguard.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">drakguard</emphasis> כמשתמש על (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</" +"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard " +"package (not installed by default)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:21 en/msecgui.xml:19 +msgid "Presentation" +msgstr "הצגה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to " +"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three " +"useful capabilities:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by " +"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can " +"only execute what you accept them to execute." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/" +"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To " +"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker " +"DansGuardian." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:49 +msgid "Configuring Parental controls" +msgstr "הגדרת בקרת הורים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, " +"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on " +"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel " +"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named " +"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by " +"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this " +"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will " +"then suggest you reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental " +"control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab " +"is opened." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the " +"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all " +"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have " +"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the " +"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are " +"not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an " +"user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to " +"remove him/her from the allowed users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:77 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed " +"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and " +"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time " +"window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:83 +msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab" +msgstr "לשונית רשימת הדחייה/ההתרה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:90 +msgid "Block Programs Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:92 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to " +"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the " +"applications you wish to block." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand " +"side will not be subject to acl blocking." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:9 +msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines" +msgstr "שיתוף הקישור לאינטרנט עם מחשבים אחרים ברשת מקומית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakgw.xml:12 +msgid "drakgw" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:17 +msgid "drakgw.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:25 +msgid "Principles" +msgstr "עקרונות" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:29 +msgid "../drakgw-net.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a " +"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local " +"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to " +"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the " +"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card " +"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to " +"the Internet (2)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are " +"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:45 +msgid "Gateway wizard" +msgstr "אשף שער הגישה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:48 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">drakgw</emphasis> כמשתמש על (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps " +"which are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this " +"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:60 +msgid "" +"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard " +"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that " +"what is proposed is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:66 +msgid "" +"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes " +"one, check that this is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask " +"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual " +"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:78 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to " +"specify the address of a DNS server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:84 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure " +"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:91 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, " +"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the " +"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:99 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to " +"printers and to share them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:104 +msgid "" +"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:109 +msgid "Configure the client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:111 +msgid "" +"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to " +"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address " +"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting " +"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is " +"using." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular " +"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the " +"gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:123 +msgid "Stop connection sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch " +"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:3 +msgid "Hosts definitions" +msgstr "הגדרת מארחים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:5 +msgid "drakhosts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:10 +msgid "drakhosts.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-" +"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to " +"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name " +"instead of the IP-address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:20 +msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:22 +msgid "" +"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window " +"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an " +"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:27 +msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:29 +msgid "" +"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the " +"same window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall" +msgstr "הגדרות מתקדמות למנשקי הרשת וחומת־האש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "drakinvictus" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:8 +msgid "drakinvictus.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:12 en/draknetcenter.xml:127 en/drakups.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:11 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:8 +msgid "Network Center" +msgstr "מרכז הרשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:9 +msgid "draknetcenter" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:13 +msgid "draknetcenter.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Network & Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network " +"Center\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21 +msgid "" +"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks " +"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, " +"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending " +"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its " +"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a " +"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, " +"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the " +"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows " +"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, " +"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not " +"connected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:34 +msgid "" +"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected " +"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</" +"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the " +"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either " +"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or " +"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to " +"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window " +"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in " +"particular)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:43 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:46 +msgid "draknetcenter1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:51 +msgid "The Monitor button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:54 +msgid "draknetcenter4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:57 +msgid "" +"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the " +"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is " +"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray " +"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:61 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the " +"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which " +"gives details about connection status." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</" +"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:70 +msgid "The Configure button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:71 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:74 +msgid "draknetcenter2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:77 +msgid "" +"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. " +"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> " +"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual " +"configuration may give better results." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:81 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks " +"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the " +"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are " +"available from your providers website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count " +"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in " +"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may " +"have to reconnect to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:89 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:" +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:94 en/draknetcenter.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:100 +msgid "draknetcenter5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:104 +msgid "Only the items not already seen above are explained." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:107 +msgid "draknetcenter3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:111 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access " +"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected. " +"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as " +"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:116 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118 +msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know these settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:119 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a " +"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA " +"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used " +"in private networks." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access " +"point while remaining connected to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:132 +msgid "draknetcenter6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:137 +msgid "The Advanced Settings button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:143 +msgid "draknetcenter7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:12 +msgid "Manage different network profiles" +msgstr "ניהול פרופילי רשת שונים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:14 en/draknetprofile.xml:46 +msgid "Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix " +"set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a " +"desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between " +"various network environments: having the system run in different network " +"environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given " +"network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each " +"time the network environment changes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:31 +msgid "Profiles" +msgstr "פרופילים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a " +"standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>\"network profile\"</" +"emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, defined for " +"a specific network environment. Each network profile has a <emphasis " +"role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes out of " +"system generation has the name <emphasis>\"default\"</emphasis>; when a new " +"profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all " +"already existing profile names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center " +"(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing profiles. " +"This GUI allows to" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:56 +msgid "" +"switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the " +"\"current profile\"," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:61 +msgid "create a new, additional profile," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:65 +msgid "delete a profile from the list of defined profiles." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:73 +msgid "Running Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:76 +msgid "Defining profiles, profile switching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:78 +msgid "" +"Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its " +"users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, " +"launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:86 +msgid "./draknetprofile_mcc.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & " +"Internet tab</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:98 +msgid "" +"launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:103 +msgid "select the \"Network & Internet\" tab," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:107 +msgid "" +"hit \"Manage different network profiles\" in the \"Personalize and Secure " +"your network\" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a " +"terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when standard-" +"output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - for " +"instance for debugging). Simply type:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:124 +msgid "<literal> draknetprofile </literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:130 +msgid "After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:136 +msgid "./draknetprofile_main.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:140 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of Draknetprofile</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:145 +msgid "" +"The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently " +"defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:152 +msgid "" +"\"Activate\" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as " +"the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:158 +msgid "\"New\" ... create a new profile;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:162 +msgid "" +"\"Delete\" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:167 +msgid "\"Quit\" ... exit from Draknetprofile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:171 +msgid "" +"Before hitting the \"Activate\" or the \"Delete\" button, you have to select " +"a profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the " +"target profile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:175 +msgid "" +"Hitting the \"New\" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can " +"type the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different " +"from any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise " +"copy of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the " +"current profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties " +"(modify the automatically created configuration) in a second, independent " +"action:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:188 +msgid "exit from Draknetprofile (hit the \"Quit\" button)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:192 +msgid "" +"back in the \"Network & Internet\" tab, you select the tab \"Set up a " +"new network interface (...)\" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:198 +msgid "" +"you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are " +"similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during " +"system generation - as documented in the <link linkend='drakconnect-" +"ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:206 +msgid "" +"The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the \"Advanced\" " +"button to make it visible. It should display the list of names of " +"Draknetprofile <emphasis role='bold'>\"modules\"</emphasis> (such as " +"\"network\", \"firewall\", \"urpmi\"), each with a check-button next to the " +"name; these check-buttons determine whether the properties controlled by " +"that module are included into the profile or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:217 +msgid "Using a system that has more than one profile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:219 +msgid "" +"In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user " +"interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the " +"bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you " +"will get a message like" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:230 +msgid "" +"<literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) roaming* </" +"literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:237 +msgid "" +"Type 1 or 2 to select the \"default\", respectively the \"roaming\" profile, " +"or carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk " +"(the profile that was active when the system had been shut down)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:242 +msgid "" +"Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens " +"that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a " +"profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This " +"problem is under investigation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:251 +msgid "Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:253 +msgid "" +"The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory " +"<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names " +"like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:257 +msgid "" +"The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file " +"<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:9 +msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS" +msgstr "שיתוף כוננים וספריות בעזרת NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknfs.xml:11 +msgid "draknfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:16 +msgid "draknfs.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:24 +msgid "Prerequisites" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the " +"first time, it may display the following message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:33 +msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:42 +msgid "Main window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:44 +msgid "" +"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list " +"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a " +"configuration tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:50 +msgid "Modify entry" +msgstr "שינוי מובאה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched " +"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are " +"available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:58 +msgid "draknfs4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:64 +msgid "NFS Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The " +"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:72 +msgid "Host access" +msgstr "גישת מארח" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared " +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:77 +msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name " +"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard " +"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the " +"domain cs.foo.edu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all " +"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either " +"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:96 +msgid "User ID Mapping" +msgstr "מיפוי זהוי משתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid " +"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client " +"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on " +"the server itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. " +"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids " +"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP " +"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID " +"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of " +"the anonymous account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:118 +msgid "Advanced options" +msgstr "הגדרות מתקדמות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests " +"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option " +"is on by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:124 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read " +"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any " +"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by " +"using this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:129 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from " +"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made " +"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:134 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can " +"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See " +"exports(5) man page for more details." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:176 +msgid "Menu entries" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:143 +msgid "So far the list has at least one entry." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:147 +msgid "draknfs5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:182 +msgid "File|Write conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:155 +msgid "Save the current configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:159 +msgid "NFS Server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:197 +msgid "" +"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:166 +msgid "NFS Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:204 +msgid "" +"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:10 +msgid "Proxy" +msgstr "שרת מתווך (Proxy)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:12 +msgid "drakproxy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:17 +msgid "drakproxy.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use " +"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net " +"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify " +"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:30 +msgid "" +"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a " +"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as " +"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control their complexity." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3 +msgid "Configure Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22 +msgid "" +"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as " +"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources " +"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button " +"below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a " +"USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media " +"used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new " +"packages, you should disable (or delete) this media.  (It will have the " +"media type CD-Rom)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called " +"i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether " +"your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They " +"don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both " +"the i586 and the x86_64 media." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:40 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" " +"id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:46 +msgid "The columns" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:48 +msgid "Column Enable:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with " +"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:54 +msgid "Column Update:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:56 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only " +"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, " +"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root " +"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62 +msgid "Column medium:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release " +"versions contain at least:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs " +"available supported by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs " +"which are not free" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there " +"might be patent claims in some countries." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:82 +msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the " +"this version of Mageia was released." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since " +"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium " +"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:97 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions " +"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests " +"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the " +"corrections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111 +msgid "The buttons on the right" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114 +msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116 +msgid "" +"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to " +"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since " +"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:121 +msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and " +"proxy)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories " +"contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the \"Add\" button " +"adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that " +"you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a " +"specific mirror, then add it by choosing \"Add a specific media mirror\" " +"from the drop-down \"File\" menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135 +msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list " +"in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same " +"release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will " +"be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:145 en/harddrake2.xml:64 +msgid "The menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:147 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:149 +msgid "" +"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and " +"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:152 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's " +"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the " +"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. " +"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose " +"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the " +"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by " +"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165 +msgid "drakrpmEditMedia2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:169 +msgid "" +"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very " +"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available " +"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:174 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:176 +msgid "" +"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that " +"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:181 +msgid "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:179 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a " +"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, " +"according to the medium type)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:187 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed" +"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to " +"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by " +"default-, update only, always or never)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:194 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:196 +msgid "" +"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate " +"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the " +"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</" +"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on " +"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:203 +msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:204 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:206 +msgid "" +"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it " +"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if " +"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:213 +msgid "" +"For more information about configuring the media, see <link ns2:href=" +"\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management\">the Mageia Wiki page</" +"link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:3 +msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:6 +msgid "draksambashare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:11 +msgid "draksambashare.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some " +"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure " +"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is " +"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the " +"resources of the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:28 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:30 +msgid "" +"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP " +"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with " +"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies " +"the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The " +"firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:41 +msgid "Wizard - Standalone server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:44 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold" +"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:43 +msgid "" +"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks " +"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are " +"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:52 +msgid "draksambashare0.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:56 +msgid "" +"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already " +"selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:60 +msgid "draksambashare1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the " +"access to the shared resources." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on " +"the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:72 +msgid "draksambashare2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:76 +msgid "Choose the security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the " +"resource" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for " +"each share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:90 +msgid "" +"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP " +"address or host name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:95 +msgid "draksambashare3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be " +"described in the Windows workstations." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:104 +msgid "draksambashare4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:108 +msgid "" +"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:113 +msgid "draksambashare5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:117 +msgid "" +"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the " +"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/" +"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:123 +msgid "draksambashare6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:129 +msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:133 +msgid "draksambashare13.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain " +"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is " +"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are " +"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the " +"security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:142 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and " +"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized " +"account repository is shared between (security) controllers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:151 +msgid "Declare a directory to share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:153 +msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:157 +msgid "draksambashare15.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:161 +msgid "" +"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</" +"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is " +"visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share name can not be " +"modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:168 +msgid "draksambashare16.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:178 +msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:184 +msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:189 +msgid "Samba server|Configure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:191 +msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:195 +msgid "Samba server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:202 +msgid "Samba Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:210 +msgid "Printers share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:212 +msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:216 +msgid "draksambashare17.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:214 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:58 en/rpmdrake.xml:163 en/rpmdrake.xml:173 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 en/rpmdrake.xml:193 en/rpmdrake.xml:203 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:238 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:222 +msgid "Samba users" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:227 +msgid "draksambashare18.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:224 +msgid "" +"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared " +"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref " +"linkend=\"userdrake\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksec.xml:3 +msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools" +msgstr "הגדרת אימות לכלים של Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksec.xml:6 +msgid "draksec" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:11 +msgid "draksec0.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:19 +msgid "" +"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks " +"usually done by the administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:22 +msgid "Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:27 +msgid "draksec.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in " +"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a " +"drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the " +"same MCC tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:43 +msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:53 +msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:11 +msgid "Snapshots" +msgstr "תמונות מערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12 +msgid "draksnapshot-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:18 +msgid "draksnapshot-config.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is available in MCC's " +"<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration tools</" +"guilabel> section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message " +"about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to " +"proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the " +"<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable Backups</" +"guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, <guilabel>Backup the " +"whole system</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to " +"the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and " +"files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the <guilabel>Exclude</" +"guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from the chosen " +"directories, that should <emphasis role=\"bold\">not</emphasis> be included " +"in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the " +"<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted " +"USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis role=\"bold\">/run/media/" +"your_user_name/</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:45 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksound.xml:3 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות קול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksound.xml:4 +msgid "draksound" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:8 +msgid "draksound.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:13 +msgid "" +"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and " +"troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you " +"change the sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound " +"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting " +"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio " +"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:20 +msgid "" +"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it " +"enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It " +"is also recommended to leave it enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with " +"fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this " +"before asking the community for help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an " +"obvious button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:30 +msgid "draksound1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring" +msgstr "הגדרת אל־פסק למעקב אחר צריכת החשמל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "drakups" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakups.xml:8 +msgid "drakups.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:3 +msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:6 +msgid "drakvpn" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:11 +msgid "drakvpn1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure " +"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local " +"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the " +"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is " +"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the " +"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:30 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:32 +msgid "" +"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which " +"protocol is used for your virtual private network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:35 +msgid "Then give your connection a name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:37 +msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:42 +msgid "For Cisco VPN" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:48 +msgid "drakvpn3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the " +"first time the tool is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:59 +msgid "drakvpn7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you " +"received from the network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:64 +msgid "Advanced parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:68 +msgid "drakvpn8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:72 +msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:76 +msgid "" +"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN " +"connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:79 +msgid "" +"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network " +"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect " +"to this VPN." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "Configure webserver" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_apache2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"web server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:15 +msgid "What is a web server?" +msgstr "מהו שרת רשת?" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be " +"accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the web server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:34 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:49 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:34 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:38 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:38 +msgid "Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:49 +msgid "Server User Module" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:56 +msgid "Allows users to create their own sites." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:60 +msgid "User web directory name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will " +"display it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:71 +msgid "Server Document Root" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:78 +msgid "Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:82 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:83 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:71 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:144 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:105 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "סיכום" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:89 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:91 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:78 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:153 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:112 +msgid "" +"Take a second to check these options, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:93 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:82 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:173 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:116 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "סיום" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:96 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:100 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:89 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:183 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:123 +msgid "You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DNS" +msgstr "הגדרת DNS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard bind" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_bind.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DHCP" +msgstr "הגדרת DHCP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:5 +msgid "drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:10 +msgid "drakwizard_dhcp.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net " +"interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should " +"be installed before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:26 +msgid "What is DHCP?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a " +"standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically " +"configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet " +"communication. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:35 +msgid "Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:37 +msgid "Welcome to the DHCP server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:45 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:54 +msgid "Selecting Adaptor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:58 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for " +"which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:68 +msgid "Select IP range" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:76 +msgid "" +"Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want " +"the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to " +"some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:87 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:96 +msgid "Hold on..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:100 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and " +"change things around." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:109 +msgid "Hours later..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:113 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:121 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:87 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:189 +msgid "What is done" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:125 +msgid "Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:134 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from <code>/usr/share/" +"wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and adding the new " +"parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:140 +msgid "<code>hname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:144 +msgid "<code>dns</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:148 +msgid "net" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:152 +msgid "ip" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:156 +msgid "<code>mask</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:160 +msgid "<code>rng1</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:164 +msgid "<code>rng2</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:168 +msgid "<code>dname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:172 +msgid "<code>gateway</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:176 +msgid "<code>tftpserverip</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:180 +msgid "<code>dhcpd_interface</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:186 +msgid "" +"Also modifying Webmin configuration file <code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</" +"code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:191 +msgid "Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code>" +msgstr "<code>dhcpd</code> מופעל מחדש." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:10 +msgid "Configure time" +msgstr "הגדרת זמן" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:19 +msgid "drakwizard_ntp.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> purpose is to set the " +"time of your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed " +"by default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base " +"packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:32 +msgid "Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:36 +msgid "" +"After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three " +"time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice " +"because this server always points to available time servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:43 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:49 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata><info> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:51 +msgid "<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:50 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:63 +msgid "" +"The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you " +"arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it " +"using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, " +"click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It " +"may take a while and you finally get this screen below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:78 +msgid "Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:89 +msgid "This tool executes the following steps:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:93 +msgid "Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to <code>/etc/sysconfig/" +"clock.orig</code> and <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to <code>/etc/ntp/" +"step-tickers.orig</code>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of " +"servers;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server " +"name;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and <code>ntpd</" +"code> services;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:119 +msgid "" +"Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "Configure FTP" +msgstr "הגדרת FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_proftpd.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>FTP</acronym> server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:15 +msgid "What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:17 +msgid "" +"File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network " +"protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a " +"<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:49 +msgid "Server Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email " +"complaints too and whether to allow root login access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:60 +msgid "Server Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> " +"(File eXchange Protocol)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:10 +msgid "Configure proxy" +msgstr "הגדרת שרת מתווך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:17 +msgid "drakwizard_squid.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed " +"before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:29 +msgid "What is a proxy server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:31 +msgid "" +"A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts " +"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:40 +msgid "Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:42 +msgid "Welcome to the proxy server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:50 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:60 +msgid "Selecting the proxy port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:69 +msgid "" +"Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:74 +msgid "Set Memory and Disk Usage" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:78 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:88 +msgid "Select Network Access Control" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:92 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Set visibility to local network or world, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:102 +msgid "Grant Network Access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:106 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:111 +msgid "Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:116 +msgid "Use Upper Level Proxy Server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:120 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:125 +msgid "Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:130 +msgid "Upper Level Proxy URL and Port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:134 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:148 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:158 +msgid "Start during boot?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:162 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:168 +msgid "" +"Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:177 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:193 +msgid "Installing the package squid if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:197 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf." +"orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:202 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from <code>squid.conf." +"default</code> and adding the new parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:208 +msgid "<code>cache_dir</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:212 +msgid "<code>localnet</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:216 +msgid "cache_mem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:220 +msgid "http_port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:224 +msgid "" +"<code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:229 +msgid "<code>cache_peer</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:233 +msgid "<code>visible_hostname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:239 +msgid "Restarting <code>squid.</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration" +msgstr "הגדרת תוכנת הרקע OpenSSH" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_sshd.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16 +msgid "What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data " +"communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and " +"other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, " +"via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client " +"(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, " +"respectively). (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:22 +msgid "Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:24 +msgid "Welcome to the Open SSH wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:28 +msgid "Select Type of Configure Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:31 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or <guilabel>Newbie</" +"guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:39 +msgid "General Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות כלליות" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:42 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:50 +msgid "Authentication Methods" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:53 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, " +"then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:61 +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Choose logging facility and level of output, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:72 +msgid "Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:75 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:79 +msgid "Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:83 +msgid "User Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:86 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:90 +msgid "" +"Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:94 +msgid "Compression and Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:97 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:101 +msgid "" +"Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:108 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:119 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them" +msgstr "ניהול שירותי המערכת על ידי הפעלתם או ניטרולם" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:4 +msgid "drakxservices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:8 +msgid "drakxservices.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:10 +msgid "Hardware configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:12 +msgid "harddrake2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:17 +msgid "harddrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of " +"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job " +"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command " +"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-" +"lst</code> package." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:31 +msgid "The window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:33 +msgid "The window is divided in two columns." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:35 +msgid "" +"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are " +"grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a " +"category. Each device can be selected in this column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The right column displays information about the selected device. The " +"<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information " +"about the content of the fields." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:43 +msgid "" +"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are " +"available at the bottom of the right column:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to " +"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must " +"used by experts only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:54 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can " +"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:68 +msgid "" +"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to " +"enable automatic detection:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:73 +msgid "modem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:77 +msgid "Jaz devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:81 +msgid "Zip parallel devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:83 +msgid "" +"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check " +"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will " +"be operational the next time this tool is started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7 +msgid "keyboarddrake" +msgstr "מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake)" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:12 +msgid "keyboarddrake.png" +msgstr "keyboarddrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה, באמצעות כתיבת <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">keyboarddrake</emphasis>as root." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19 +msgid "" +"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you " +"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. " +"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found " +"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled " +"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"." +msgstr "" +"כלי מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake)<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> עוזר " +"לך בהגדרת הפריסה הבסיסית למקלדת שבה ברצונך להשתמש ב־Mageia. הוא משפיע על " +"פריסת המקלדת עבור כל המשתמשים במערכת. ניתן למצוא אותו במקטע החומרה של מרכז " +"הבקרה של Mageia בשם \"הגדרת עכבר ומקלדת\"." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29 +msgid "Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "פריסת מקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed " +"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each " +"layout should be used for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37 +msgid "Keyboard Type" +msgstr "סוג מקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are " +"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:10 +msgid "Manage localization for your system" +msgstr "ניהול התאמה למיקום של המערכת שלך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/localedrake.xml:13 +msgid "localedrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/localedrake.xml:18 +msgid "localedrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the " +"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage " +"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can " +"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate " +"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:34 +msgid "" +"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected " +"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to " +"countries not listed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:38 +msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input " +"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, " +"Korean, etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:48 +msgid "" +"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so " +"users should not need to configure it manually." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions " +"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another " +"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:3 +msgid "View and search system logs" +msgstr "עיון וחיפוש ברישומי מערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/logdrake.xml:5 +msgid "logdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:10 +msgid "logdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</" +"guilabel>\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:22 +msgid "To do a search in the logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do " +"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) to search in " +"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to " +"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month " +"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>" +"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the " +"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is " +"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia " +"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are " +"updated each time a configuration is modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:43 +msgid "To configure a mail alert" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and " +"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</" +"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure " +"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running " +"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. " +"(See screenshot above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The following services can be watched :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:59 +msgid "Webmin Service" +msgstr "שירות Webmin" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:63 +msgid "Postfix Mail Server" +msgstr "שרת הדוא\"ל של Postfix" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:67 +msgid "FTP Server" +msgstr "שרת FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:71 +msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server" +msgstr "שרת WWW של APACHI" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:75 +msgid "SSH Server" +msgstr "שרת SSH" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:79 +msgid "Samba Server" +msgstr "שרת סמבה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:83 +msgid "Xinetd Service" +msgstr "שירות Xinetd " + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:87 +msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:91 +msgid "logdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider " +"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows " +"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone " +"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value " +"to 3 times the number of processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the " +"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local " +"or on the Internet)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Display Available NFS And SMB Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:11 +msgid "lsnetdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lsnetdrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Documentation team.</link> Thanking you in " +"advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:3 +msgid "Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:6 +msgid "lspcidrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:10 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lspcidrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line. It will give some more information if used under " +"root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, " +"PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst " +"packages to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:20 +msgid "lspcidrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it " +"is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:31 +msgid "Information about the graphic card;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:33 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:35 +msgid "Information about the network" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:37 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:39 +msgid "-i to ignore case distinctions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:41 +msgid "" +"In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for " +"lspcidrake and the -i option for grep." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:46 +msgid "lspcidrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is " +"called <emphasis role=\"bold\">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3 +msgid "Software Packages Update" +msgstr "עדכון חבילות תוכנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5 +msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:10 +msgid "MageiaUpdate.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</" +"emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:20 +msgid "" +"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with drakrpm-" +"editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are " +"prompted to do so." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:25 +msgid "" +"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists " +"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by " +"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the " +"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:30 +msgid "" +"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of " +"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title " +"means you can click to drop down a text." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:38 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:21 +msgid "MageiaUpdate1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35 +msgid "" +"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by " +"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/" +"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "אתחול" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-boot.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot " +"steps. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19 +msgid "Configure boot steps" +msgstr "הגדרות שלבי האתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:12 en/MCC.xml:4 +msgid "Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "מרכז הבקרה של Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:14 +msgid "The tools to configure the Mageia system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:17 +msgid "../mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:21 en/MCC.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:24 en/MCC.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</" +"link> שפותחה על ידי <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:26 en/MCC.xml:11 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4 +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "חומרה" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-hardware.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your " +"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20 +msgid "Manage your hardware" +msgstr "ניהול חומרה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34 +msgid "Configure graphics" +msgstr "הגדרות גרפיקה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48 +msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard" +msgstr "הגדרות עכבר ומקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61 +msgid "Configure printing and scanning" +msgstr "הגדרות הדפסה וסריקה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), " +"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58 +msgid "Others" +msgstr "שונות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3 +msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to " +"choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was " +"installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be " +"selected in the big right panel." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8 +msgid "" +"The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10 +msgid "" +"The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in " +"any of the MCC tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool " +"screens." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:14 +msgid "" +"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on " +"the \"Search\" tab in the left column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17 +msgid "Local disks" +msgstr "כוננים מקומיים" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:11 +msgid "mcc-localdisks.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your " +"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17 +msgid "Network Services" +msgstr "שרותי רשת" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networkservices.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if " +"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose " +"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or " +"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4 +msgid "Network Sharing" +msgstr "שיתופי רשת" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networksharing.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and " +"directories. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17 +msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares" +msgstr "הגדרות שיתופי וינדוז" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and " +"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22 +msgid "Configure NFS shares" +msgstr "הגדרות שיתופי NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27 +msgid "Configure WebDAV shares" +msgstr "הגדרות שיתופי WebDAV" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:3 +msgid "Network and Internet" +msgstr "רשת ואינטרנט" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:8 +msgid "mcc-network.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link " +"below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:18 +msgid "Manage your network devices" +msgstr "הגדרות התקני רשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:36 +msgid "Personalize and Secure your network" +msgstr "הגדרות פרטיות ואבטחה ברשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:39 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:43 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:47 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:51 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:61 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "הגדרות אבטחה" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-security.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a " +"link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, " +"permissions and audit</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:37 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17 +msgid "Sharing" +msgstr "שיתוף" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-sharing.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only " +"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can " +"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link " +"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:3 +msgid "System" +msgstr "מערכת" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:7 +msgid "mcc-system.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:10 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration " +"tools. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:14 +msgid "Manage system services" +msgstr "הגדרות שירותי המערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:22 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:28 +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "התאמה למקום" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:30 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:39 +msgid "Administration tools" +msgstr "כלי ניהול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:44 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3 +msgid "Configure updates frequency" +msgstr "הגדרת תדירות העדכונים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5 +msgid "mgaapplet-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:10 +msgid "mgaapplet-config.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</" +"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates " +"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject" +"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for " +"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The " +"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)" +msgstr "הגדרת התקן הצבעה (עכבר, לוח מגע)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:6 +msgid "mousedrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:11 +msgid "mousedrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by " +"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse " +"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any " +"PS/2 & USB mice\" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is " +"immediately taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:3 +msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/msecgui.xml:5 +msgid "msecgui" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:13 +msgid "msecgui.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"msecgui<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is a graphic user interface " +"for msec that allows to configure your system security according to two " +"approaches:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:28 +msgid "" +"It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to " +"make it more secure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn " +"you if something seems dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:38 +msgid "" +"msec uses the concept of \"security levels\" which are intended to configure " +"a set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or " +"enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your " +"own customised security levels." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:45 +msgid "Overview tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:47 +msgid "See the screenshot above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a " +"button on the right side to configure them:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:59 +msgid "Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:64 +msgid "msec itself with some information:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:68 +msgid "enabled or not" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:72 +msgid "the configured Base security level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:76 +msgid "" +"the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report " +"and another button to execute the checks just now." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:86 +msgid "Security settings tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:88 +msgid "" +"A click on the second tab or on the Security <guibutton>Configure</" +"guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:94 +msgid "msecgui2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:100 +msgid "Basic security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security levels:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:106 +msgid "" +"After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab " +"allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then " +"in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The " +"following levels are available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you " +"do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on " +"your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or " +"constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only " +"if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system " +"vulnerable to attack." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:122 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">standard</emphasis>. This is the default " +"configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It " +"constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which " +"detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory " +"permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec " +"versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:131 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when " +"you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts " +"system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to " +"the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and " +"5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, " +"such as the <emphasis role=\"bold\">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"bold\">netbook</emphasis> " +"levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure system security according to " +"the most common use cases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:149 +msgid "" +"The last two levels called <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_daily </emphasis> " +"and <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security " +"levels but rather tools for periodic checks only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:156 +msgid "" +"These levels are saved in <filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></" +"filename>. You can define your own customised security levels, saving them " +"into specific files called <filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed " +"into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised or more secure system " +"configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:165 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default " +"level settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:170 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security alerts:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:173 +msgid "" +"If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email to:</" +"guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent by " +"local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You " +"can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail " +"and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive " +"the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to " +"enable it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:182 +msgid "" +"It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to " +"immediately inform the security administrator of possible security problems. " +"If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs files " +"available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:190 +msgid "" +"Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer " +"security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change " +"any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in <filename>/" +"etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains the current " +"security level name and the list of all the modifications done to the " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:199 +msgid "System security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:201 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a " +"description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side " +"column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:207 +msgid "msecgui3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:211 +msgid "" +"To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see " +"screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the " +"actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be " +"selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:219 +msgid "msecgui11.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:224 +msgid "" +"Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration " +"using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you " +"have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before " +"saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:232 +msgid "msecgui10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:238 +msgid "Network security" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:240 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:245 +msgid "msecgui4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:251 +msgid "Periodic checks tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:253 +msgid "" +"Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of " +"security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:257 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency " +"if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is " +"checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:264 +msgid "msecgui5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:270 +msgid "Exceptions tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:272 +msgid "" +"Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In " +"these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab " +"allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert " +"messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot " +"below shows four exceptions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:280 +msgid "msecgui6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:284 +msgid "" +"To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:289 +msgid "msecgui7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:293 +msgid "" +"Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called " +"<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the <guilabel>Exception</" +"guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is obviously not definitive, " +"you can either delete it using the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of " +"the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> tab or modify it with a double clicK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:303 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "הרשאות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:304 +msgid "" +"This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and " +"enforcement." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:306 +msgid "" +"Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, " +"secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security level. " +"You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them into " +"specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed into " +"the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is " +"also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission " +"you want. Current configuration is stored in <filename>/etc/security/msec/" +"perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the list of all the modifications " +"done to the permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:318 +msgid "msecgui8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:321 +msgid "" +"Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You " +"can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the " +"owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a " +"given rule:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:327 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the " +"defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message " +"if not, but does not change anything." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:333 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the " +"permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the " +"permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:337 +msgid "" +"For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:339 +msgid "" +"To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button " +"and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in " +"the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:345 +msgid "msecgui9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:348 +msgid "" +"Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do " +"not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the " +"menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed " +"the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:353 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the " +"configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:356 +msgid "" +"Changes in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permission tab</emphasis> (or " +"directly in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first " +"periodic check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately " +"into account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You " +"can use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will " +"be changed by msecperms." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:363 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file " +"manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked " +"in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will " +"write the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the " +"configuration of the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:4 +msgid "Other Mageia Tools" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:7 +msgid "" +"There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia " +"Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the " +"next pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:11 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug_report\"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lsnetdrake\"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:29 +msgid "And more tools?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6 +msgid "rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:11 +msgid "rpmdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, " +"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the " +"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online " +"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official " +"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages " +"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only " +"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by " +"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed " +"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries " +"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names " +"included in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35 +msgid "" +"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend=" +"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><important><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43 +msgid "rpmdrake8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for " +"the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake " +"will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up " +"window : <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the above message " +"annoys you and you have a good internet connection without too strict " +"download limit, it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online " +"repositories thanks to <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more " +"packages, and allow to update your installed packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The main parts of the screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:60 +msgid "rpmdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:67 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first " +"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical " +"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their " +"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, " +"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who " +"probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading " +"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge " +"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </" +"firstterm>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the " +"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and " +"not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their " +"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included " +"in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:105 +msgid "" +"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword " +"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and " +"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" " +"box ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and " +"sub categories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:125 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:127 +msgid "" +"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete " +"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It " +"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the " +"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:137 +msgid "The status column" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by " +"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A " +"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium " +"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is " +"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or " +"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:155 +msgid "Icon" +msgstr "סמל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:157 +msgid "Legend" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:165 +msgid "../rpmdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:169 +msgid "This package is already installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:175 +msgid "../rpmdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:179 +msgid "This package will be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:185 +msgid "../rpmdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:189 +msgid "This package cannot be modified" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:195 +msgid "../rpmdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199 +msgid "This package is an update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:205 +msgid "../rpmdrake6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:209 +msgid "This package will be uninstalled" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:147 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:215 +msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219 +msgid "" +"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status " +"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking " +"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:227 +msgid "" +"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange " +"with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when " +"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:235 +msgid "The dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:240 +msgid "rpmdrake7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:245 +msgid "" +"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They " +"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an " +"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected " +"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It " +"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed " +"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a " +"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to " +"install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Set up scanner" +msgstr "הגדרת סורק" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11 +msgid "scannerdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "התקנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing " +"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. " +"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a " +"remote computer or to access remote scanners." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following " +"message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-" +"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:44 +msgid "scannerdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see " +"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, " +"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner " +"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannersharing\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its " +"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new " +"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a " +"scanner manually</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the " +"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:69 +msgid "scannerdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79 +msgid "" +"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported " +"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums." +"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87 +msgid "Choose port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:91 +msgid "scannerdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</" +"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, " +"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen " +"similar to the one below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104 +msgid "" +"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:108 +msgid "scannerdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117 +msgid "Scannersharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:122 +msgid "scannerdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be " +"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also " +"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on " +"this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or " +"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on " +"this computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted " +"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:143 +msgid "scannerdrake6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149 +msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:153 +msgid "scannerdrake7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote " +"machines." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:164 +msgid "scannerdrake8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170 +msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:175 +msgid "scannerdrake9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181 +msgid "" +"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool " +"offers to do it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184 +msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive " +"\"net\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193 +msgid "" +"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</" +"emphasis> to be started on boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278 +msgid "Specifics" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205 +msgid "Hewlett-Packard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207 +msgid "" +"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> " +"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow " +"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214 +msgid "Epson" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/" +"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must " +"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict " +"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be " +"ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231 +msgid "Extra installation steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234 +msgid "" +"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref " +"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra " +"steps to correctly configure your scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded " +"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, " +"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the " +"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you " +"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241 +msgid "" +"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at " +"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/" +"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250 +msgid "" +"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know " +"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://" +"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15 +msgid "Software Management" +msgstr "ניהול תוכנה" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/software-management.xml:10 +msgid "software-management.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. " +"Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:17 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media " +"sources for install and update</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8 +msgid "Install and configure a printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11 +msgid "system-config-printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:16 +msgid "system-config-printer.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link " +"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration " +"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia " +"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer " +"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu " +"and openSUSE." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30 +msgid "" +"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the " +"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-" +"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34 +msgid "" +"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> " +"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure " +"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/" +">." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42 +msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45 +msgid "task-printing-server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47 +msgid "task-printing-hp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50 +msgid "" +"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of " +"dependencies are needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53 +msgid "" +"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to " +"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a " +"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a " +"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window " +"will also attempt to configure a network printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61 +msgid "Automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63 +msgid "" +"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the " +"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next" +"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be " +"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known " +"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the " +"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72 +msgid "No automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:76 +msgid "printer3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80 +msgid "" +"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window " +"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86 +msgid "Select printer from database" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92 +msgid "provide PPD file" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98 +msgid "search for a driver to download" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer " +"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one " +"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have " +"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one " +"which know to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110 +msgid "Complete the installation process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112 +msgid "" +"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will " +"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is " +"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of " +"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After " +"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available " +"printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121 +msgid "Network printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or " +"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to " +"another workstation that serves as printserver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed " +"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same " +"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134 +msgid "" +"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or " +"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a " +"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label " +"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a " +"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it " +"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters " +"after \"HWaddr\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142 +msgid "" +"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to " +"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, " +"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find " +"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu " +"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it " +"says \"host\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149 +msgid "" +"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a " +"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the " +"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find " +"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160 +msgid "Network printing protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162 +msgid "" +"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as " +"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network " +"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is " +"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers " +"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-" +"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can " +"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/" +"net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is " +"not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172 +msgid "" +"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the " +"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change " +"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be " +"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is " +"the same as above." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:180 +msgid "printer5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184 +msgid "The other protocols are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can " +"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by " +"some ADSL-routers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, " +"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be " +"defined. By default, the port 631 is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but " +"with TLS secured protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be " +"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using LPD." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a " +"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226 +msgid "" +"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form " +"the URI:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231 +msgid "Appsocket" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233 +msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237 +msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239 +msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241 +msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245 +msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247 +msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251 +msgid "" +"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups." +"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256 +msgid "Device Properties" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258 +msgid "" +"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to " +"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your " +"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</" +"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which " +"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, " +"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268 +msgid "Troubleshoot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270 +msgid "" +"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by " +"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273 +msgid "" +"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</" +"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280 +msgid "" +"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in " +"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:" +"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check " +"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is " +"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo " +"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the " +"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool " +"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works " +"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date " +"drivers or for more recent devices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294 +msgid "" +"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/" +"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by " +"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298 +msgid "" +"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304 +msgid "" +"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the " +"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</" +"link>. The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</" +"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-" +"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management " +"of the printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311 +msgid "" +"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner " +"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't " +"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this " +"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the " +"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, " +"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory " +"card which is appeared in the /media folder." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321 +msgid "" +"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL " +"protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326 +msgid "" +"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</" +"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package " +"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be " +"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages " +"according to your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332 +msgid "" +"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a " +"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338 +msgid "" +"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9 +msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings" +msgstr "יבוא מסמכים והגדרות מ־Windows" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12 +msgid "transfugdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:17 +msgid "transfugdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labeled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings " +"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark " +"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered" +"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same " +"computer as the Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake " +"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some " +"explanation about the tool and import options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of " +"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to " +"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and " +"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account " +"than yours own." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:51 +msgid "transfugdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of " +"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed " +"incorrectly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications " +"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For " +"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not " +"use such accounts for the import purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import " +"documents:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:80 +msgid "transfugdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</" +"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to " +"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the document import method choosing press " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method " +"to import bookmarks:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:95 +msgid "transfugdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112 +msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:116 +msgid "transfugdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the " +"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:128 +msgid "transfugdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/userdrake.xml:11 +msgid "Users and Groups" +msgstr "משתמשים וקבוצות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/userdrake.xml:13 +msgid "userdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:18 +msgid "userdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labelled \"Manage users on system\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this " +"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings " +"(ID, shell, ...)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in " +"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the " +"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:37 +msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:41 +msgid "userdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the " +"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything " +"or nothing as well!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:49 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. " +"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, " +"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower " +"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn " +"orange and then green as the password strength improves." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure " +"you entered what you intended to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that " +"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options " +"are Bash, Dash and Sh." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if " +"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new " +"user as the only member (this may be edited)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:70 +msgid "" +"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately " +"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific " +"group ID." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:78 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given " +"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:87 +msgid "userdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:91 +msgid "" +"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. " +"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary " +"accounts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long " +"as the account is locked." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:98 +msgid "It is also possible to change the icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:100 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an " +"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his " +"password periodically." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:106 +msgid "userdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups " +"that the user is a member of." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:114 +msgid "" +"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be " +"effective until his/her next login." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the " +"group name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the " +"users who are members of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:126 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</" +"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home " +"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been " +"created for the user, it will be deleted as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:133 +msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:136 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:138 +msgid "" +"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to " +"refresh the display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:141 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is " +"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total " +"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to " +"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories " +"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, " +"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest " +"account</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the graphical server" +msgstr "הגדרת שרת גרפי" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:5 +msgid "XFdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:10 +msgid "XFdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</" +"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the " +"capital letters." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the " +"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:24 +msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:26 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server " +"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example " +"one with a proprietary driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by " +"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical " +"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> " +"Xorg</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most " +"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while " +"in your Desktop Environment." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - " +"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing " +"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to " +"use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for example)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:53 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and " +"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor " +"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the " +"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the " +"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:69 +msgid "XFdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>When you change the color depth, " +"a multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview " +"of what the selected color depth looks like." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another " +"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card " +"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to " +"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or " +"select an uncomfortable setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for " +"another one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and " +"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:92 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking " +"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the " +"graphical environment doesn't work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a " +"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use " +"XFdrake's text version." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want " +"to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is " +"right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:107 +msgid "Options:" +msgstr "אפשרויות:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-" +"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X " +"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:116 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable " +"three specific features depending on the graphic card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:121 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, " +"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</" +"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be " +"unchecked for a server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask " +"you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the " +"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect " +"and reconnect to activate the new configuration." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ffe5d9e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>מרכז הבקרה של Mageia + + The tools to configure the Mageia system + + + + + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63525172 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + +
+ + + מרכז הבקרה של Mageia + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת Calenco +CMS שפותחה על ידי NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5c9f502 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +
+ + עדכון חבילות תוכנה + + MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update as root. + is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab Software +management. + + + To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with +drakrpm-editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you +are prompted to do so. + + + As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists +those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by +default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the +Update button to start the process. + + By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of +the window. The print > before a title +means you can click to drop down a text. + + + When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by +displaying this red icon + + + + +. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68eb0372 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +
+ + הגדרת שרת גרפי + + XFdrake + + + + + + + + + This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab Hardware. Select Set up the +graphical server. + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +XFdrake as normal user or drakx11 +as root. Mind the capital letters. + + + + + The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration. + + Graphic card: + + The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server +configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example +one with a proprietary driver. + + The available servers are sorted under Vendor by +manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical +order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under +Xorg. + + + In case of problems, Xorg - Vesa will work with most +graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while +in your Desktop Environment. + + If even Vesa doesn't work, choose Xorg - +fbdev, which is used while installing +Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates. + If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to +use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for +example). + + + + Monitor: + + In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and +you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor +isn't in the Vendor list, choose in the +Generic list a monitor with the same features. + + + + Resolution: + + This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the +colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen: + + + + + + When you change the color depth, a +multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview +of what the selected color depth looks like. + + The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another +one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card +and the monitor, it is possible to click on Other to +set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or +select an uncomfortable setting. + + The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for +another one. + + + Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and +restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect. + + + + + Test: + + Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking +on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the +graphical environment doesn't work. + + + In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a +text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use +XFdrake's text version. + If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want +to change after all, click on No, if everything is +right, click on OK. + + + אפשרויות: + + + Global options: If Disable +Ctrl-Alt-Backspace is checked, it will no longer be possible to +restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys. + + + + Graphic card options: Allows you to enable or disable +three specific features depending on the graphic card. + + + + Graphical interface at startup: Most of the time, +Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon +booting is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it +may be unchecked for a server. + + + + After a click on the Quit button, the system will ask +you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the +previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect +and reconnect to activate the new configuration. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc5044db --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + +
+ + גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של WebDAV + + diskdrake --dav + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing diskdrake --dav as root. + is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled Configure +WebDAV shares. + +
+ מבוא + + WebDAV is a +protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it +appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a +WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV +server. +
+ +
+ Creating a new entry + + The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if +any, and a New button. Use it to create a new +entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen. + + Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue +with the action Mount point by clicking +OK after selecting the radio button, as the +Server is already configured. You can however correct +it, if needed. + + + + + + + + The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount +point. + + In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other +options, you can give them in the advanced screen. + + + + + + + + The option Mount allows you to mount immediately the +access. + + After you accepted the configuration with the radio button +Done, the first screen is displayed again and your +new mount point is listed. After you choose Quit, you +are asked whether or not to save the modifications in +/etc/fstab. Choose this option if you want that the +remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for +one-time usage, do not save it. +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cd783828 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + +
+ + + + +שיתוף מחיצות הכונן שלך + + diskdrake --fileshare + + + + + + + + + This simple tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing diskdrake --fileshare as root. + allows you, the +administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home +subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have +computers running either Linux or Windows operating system. + + It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled +"Share your hard disk partitions". + + First, answer the question : "Would you like to allow users to +share some of their directories ?", click on No +sharing if the answer is no for all users, click on +Allow all users for all users and click on +Custom if the answer is no for some users and yes for +the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their +directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically +created by the system. You will be asked about this later. + + Click on OK, a second screen appears which asks you +choose between NFS or SMB. +Check NFS if Linux is the only operating system on +the network, check SMB if the network includes both +Linux and Windows machines and then click on OK. Any +required packages will be installed if necessary. + + The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In +this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows +you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare +group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, +then on Edit, In the Groups tab. Check the +fileshare group and click on OK. For more information +about Userdrake, see: + + + When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and +reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account. + + + From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her +file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers +have this facility. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f56690fd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +
+ + גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של NFS + + diskdrake --nfs + + + + + + + + + + + . + + + +
+ מבוא + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing diskdrake --nfs as root. + allows you to declare some +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix +systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at +boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session +for a user with tools such as file browsers. +
+ +
+ Procedure + + Select search servers to obtain a list of servers +which share directories. + + Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the +shared directories and select the directory you want to access. + + + + + + + + The button Mount point will be available and you have +to specify where to mount the directory. + + + + + + + + After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and +change some options with the Options button. After +mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + On accepting the configuration with the Done button, +a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab +modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the +network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file +browser, for example in Dolphin. + + + + + + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18366657 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +
+ + CD/DVD burner + + diskdrake --removable + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing diskdrake --removable as root. + is found under the tab Local +disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable +hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). + + Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. + + At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and +the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change +them. Check the item to be changed and then on the OK +button. + +
+ נקודת עיגון + + Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom. + + +
+ +
+ אפשרויות + + Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the +Advanced submenu. The main are: + + + +
+ user/nouser + + user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this +option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is +the only one who can umount it. +
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d75d6d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + +
+ + + גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפים של Windows (סמבה) + + diskdrake --smb + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing diskdrake --smb as root. + allows you to declare which +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) +systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared +directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with +tools such as file browsers. + + Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of +available servers, for example with +
+ +
+ Procedure + + Select search servers to obtain a list of servers who +share directories. + + Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the +list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access. + + The Mount point button will become available, you +have to specify where to mount the directory. + + + + + + + + After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the Mount +button. You can also verify and change some options with the +Options button. + + In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to +connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it +with the same button. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask +"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow +directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The +new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in +dolphin. + + + + + + + + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24b881b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +
+ + 3D Desktop Effects + + drak3d + + + + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drak3d as root. + lets you manage the 3D +desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by +default. +
+ +
+ Getting Started + + To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the +package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can +start. + + After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you +can choose either No 3D Desktop Effects or +Compiz Fusion. Compiz Fusion is part of a +composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special +effects for your desktop. Choose Compiz Fusion to turn +it on. + + If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of +Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be +installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the +Ok button to continue. + + + + + + + + Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz +Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in +for the changes to take effect. + + After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz +Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool. +
+ +
+ פתרון בעיות + +
+ Can't See Desktop after Logging in + + If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop +but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in +screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d. + + + + + + + + When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be +prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login +with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the +log in problem. +
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9968ec8c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + +
+ + אימות + + drakauth + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakauth as root. enables you to modify the +manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net. + + By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your +computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so +and give information about that. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d5003bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +
+ + הגדרת כניסה אוטומטית לחשבון + + drakautologin + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakautologin as root. + allows you to automatically +login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any +password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good idea when there +is only one user like to be using the machine. + + It is found under the Boot tab in the +Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in". + + The interface buttons are pretty obvious: + + Check Launch the graphical environment when your system +starts, if you want X Window System to be executed after the +boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be +possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by +launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'. + + If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either +No, I don't want autologin, if you want the system to +continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check +Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop), if +needed. In this case, you also need to supply the Default +username and the Default desktop. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4664f200 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +
+ + הגדרת אתחול המערכת + + drakboot + + + + + + + + + If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is +slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition +(ESP). + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakboot as root. + allows you to configure the +boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot, +etc.) + + It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled "Set up +boot system". + + + Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing +some settings may prevent your machine from booting again ! + + + In the first part, called Bootloader, it is possible if +using BIOS, to choose which Bootloader to use, Grub, +Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question +of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the +Boot device, don't change anything here unless you +are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any +modification can prevent your machine from booting. + + In a UEFI system, the bootloader is Grub2-efi and is +installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common +to all operating systems installed. + + In the second part, called Main options, you can set +the Delay before booting default image, in +seconds. During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available +operating systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is +made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses. + + In the third and last part, called Security, it is +possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and +password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change +settings. The username is "root" and the password is the one chosen here. + + The Advanced button gives some extra options. + + Enable ACPI: + + ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the +power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was +the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI +compatible. + + Enable SMP: + + SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for +multicore processors. + + + If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual +processor and enable SMP. + + + Enable APIC and Enable Local +APIC: + + APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two +components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O +APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses +to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful +for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC +system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message +"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local +APIC. + + + + + + + + The Next screen differs depending on which boot +loader you chose. + + + + You have Grub Legacy or Lilo: + + In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot +time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu +entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you +click on the Add or Modify +buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or +to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be +able to use these tools. + + + + + + + + The Label field is freeform, write here what you want +to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For +example: Mageia3. + + The Image field contains the kernel name. It matches +the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz. + + The Root field contains the device name where the +kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1). + + The Append field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time. + + If the box Default is checked, Grub will boot this +entry by default. + + In the extra screen called Advanced, it is possible to +choose the Video mode, an initrd +file and a network profile, see , in the drop-down lists. + + + + You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in +Legacy mode and UEFI mode): + + In this case, the drop-down list labelled Default +displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default +one. + + + + + + + + The Append field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time. + + If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them +to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box +Probe Foreign OS + + In the extra screen called Advanced, it is possible to +choose the Video mode. If you don't want a bootable +Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box Do not +touch ESP or MBR and accept the warning. + + + + + + + + + Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable +unless chain loaded from another OS. + + + To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named Grub +Customizer, available in the Mageia repositories (see below). + + + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..671b7bbc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +
+ + Mageia Bug Report Tooldrakbug + + + + + + + + + Usually, this toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakbug. starts automatically +when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing +a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the +information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report. + + If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, +then please read How to +report a bug report properly before clicking on the "Report" button. + + In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message +that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to +that existing report that you saw the bug, too. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..832c157b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +
+ + + Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reportsdrakbug_report + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakbug_report as root. can only be started and used +on the command line. + +It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by +doing drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt, +but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be +several GBs large. +The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing +the unneeded parts. + This command collects the following information on your system: + + + lspci + pci_devices + dmidecode + fdisk + scsi + /sys/bus/scsi/devices + lsmod + cmdline + pcmcia: stab + usb + partitions + cpuinfo + syslog + Xorg.log + monitor_full_edid + stage1.log + ddebug.log + install.log + fstab + modprobe.conf + lilo.conf + grub: menu.lst + grub: install.sh + grub: device.map + xorg.conf + urpmi.cfg + modprobe.preload + sysconfig/i18n + /proc/iomem + /proc/ioport + mageia version + rpm -qa + df + + + + At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's +output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch +to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as +root) journalctl -a > journalctl.txt. If +you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000 +lines of the log instead with: journalctl -a | tail +-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c133162 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +
+ + ניהול תאריך ושעה + + drakclock + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakclock as root. + is found under the tab System +in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Manage date and +time". In some desktop environments it is also available by a +right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray. + + It's a very simple tool. + + On the upper left part, is the calendar. On +the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on +the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month +(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or +2012). Select the day by clicking on its number. + + On the bottom left is the Network Time +Protocol synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on +time by synchronising it with a server. Check Enable Network Time +Protocol and choose the closest server. + + On the right part is the clock. It's +useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, +minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows +to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see +your desktop environment settings for that. + + At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the +Change Time Zone button and choosing in the list the +nearest town. + + + Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they +will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation +settings. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aed9d960 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +
+ + הסרת חיבורdrakconnect --del + + + + + + + + + Here, you can delete a network interfaceYou can also start this tool from the command line, by typing drakconnect --del as root.. + Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then +click next. + You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted +successfully. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e0cf591 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,808 @@ +
+ + הגדרת מנשק רשת חדש (LAN, ISDN, ADSL ...) + + drakconnect + + + + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakconnect as root. + allows to configure much of +local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from +your access provider or your network administrator. + + Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware +and provider you have. +
+ +
+ A new Wired connection (Ethernet) + + + + The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure. + + + + At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address. + + + + Automatic IP + + + + Ethernet/IP settings: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +Assign host name from DHCP server. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely. + + + + + + + + + + The advanced button give the opportunity to specify: + + + + Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server) + + + + the DHCP client + + + + DHCP timeout + + + + Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server + + + + Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks) + + + + the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers. + + + + + + After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: + + + + + + הגדרה ידנית + + + + Ethernet/IP settings: you need to declare what DNS +servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no +HOSTNAME is specified, the name localhost.localdomain is +attributed by default. + + For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +192.168.x.x, Netmask is +255.255.255.0, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website. + + In advanced settings, you can specified a Search +domain. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic ADSL would not need this setting. + + + + + + + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + + + +
+ +
+ A new Satellite connection (DVB) + + This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. +
+ +
+ A new Cable modem connection + + + + The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure. + + + + At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address. + + + + You have to specify a authentication method: + + + + כלום + + + + BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name +and password. + + + + + + Automatic IP + + + + Cable/IP settings: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +Assign host name from DHCP server. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely. + + + + The advanced button give the opportunity to specify: + + + + Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server) + + + + the DHCP client + + + + DHCP timeout + + + + Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server + + + + Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks) + + + + the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers. + + + + + + After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: + + + + + + הגדרה ידנית + + + + Cable/IP settings: you need to declare what DNS servers +to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME +is specified, the name localhost.localdomain is +attributed by default. + + For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +192.168.x.x, Netmask is +255.255.255.0, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website. + + In advanced settings, you can specified a Search +domain. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic connection would not need this setting. + + + + + + + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + + + +
+ +
+ A new DSL connection + + + + If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it. + + + + A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +Unlisted and then enter the options your provider gave. + + + + Select one of the protocols available: + + + + פרוטוקול הגדרת מארח באופן דינמי (DHCP) + + + + הגדרה ידנית של TCP/IP + + + + PPP over ADSL (PPPoA) + + + + PPP מעל תשתית Ethernet (PPPoE) + + + + פרוטוקול ערוץ נקודה לנקודה (PPTP) + + + + + + הגדרות גישה + + + + שם משתמש (כניסה לחשבון) + + + + Account password + + + + (Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI) + + + + (Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI) + + + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + +
+ +
+ A new ISDN connection + + + + The wizard asks which device to configure: + + + + Manual choice (internal ISDN card) + + + + מודם ISDN חיצוני + + + + + + A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and +manufacturer. Select your card. + + + + Select one of the protocols available: + + + + Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP) + + + + Protocol for Europe (EDSS1) + + + + + + A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +Unlisted and then enter the options your provider gave +you. Then it is asked for parameters: + + + + שם התחברות + + + + מספר טלפון + + + + שם משתמש + + + + Account password + + + + שיטת אימות + + + + + + After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or +manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask. + + + + The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by +automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to +put: + + + + שם מתחם + + + + First and second DNS Server + + + + Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you +are sure that your provider is configured to accept it. + + + + + + The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic +or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the +IP address. + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + +
+ +
+ A new Wireless connection (WiFi) + + + + A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for +Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper +only if the other configuration methods did not work. + + + + At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that +the card has detected. + + + + Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide: + + + + + + + + + + Operating mode: + + + + מנוהל + + + To access to an existing access point (the most frequent). + + + + + Ad-Hoc + + + To configure direct connection between computers. + + + + + + + Network Name (ESSID) + + + + Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured. + + + + WPA/WPA2 + + + This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it. + + + + + WEP + + + Some old hardware deals only this encryption method. + + + + + + + מפתח הצפנה + + It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point. + + + + + + At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a +manual IP address. + + + + Automatic IP + + + + IP settings: you have to select if DNS servers are +declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is +specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The +Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +Assign host name from DHCP server + + + + The advanced button give the opportunity to specify: + + + + Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server) + + + + the DHCP client + + + + DHCP timeout + + + + Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers + + + + Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks) + + + + the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers. + + + + + + After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all +connection configurations, is explained: + + + + + + הגדרה ידנית + + + + IP settings: you have to declare DNS servers. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. + + For a residential network, the IP address always looks like +192.168.x.x, Netmask is +255.255.255.0, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your providers website. + + In advanced settings, you can specified a Search +domain. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, +before the period. + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + + + +
+ +
+ A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection + + + + If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it. + + + + The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required. + + + + The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option +Unlisted. + + + + A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +Unlisted and then enter the options your provider gave. + + + + Provide access settings + + + + שם נקודת גישה (Access Point) + + + + שם משתמש (כניסה לחשבון) + + + + Account password + + + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + +
+ +
+ A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection + + This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. +
+ +
+ A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS) + + + + The wizard asks which device to configure: + + + + בחירה ידנית + + + + Detected hardware, if any. + + + + + + A list of ports is proposed. Select your port. + + + + If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package +kppp-provider. + + + + A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +Unlisted and then enter the options your provider +gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options: + + + + Connection name + + + + Phone number + + + + Login ID + + + + Password + + + + Authentication, choose between: + + + + PAP/CHAP + + + + מבוסס תסריט (סקריפט) + + + + PAP + + + + מבוסס-מסוף + + + + CHAP + + + + + + + + The next steps are exposed at + + +
+ +
+ Ending the configuration + + In the next step, you can specify: + + + + Allow users to manage the connection + + + + Start the connection at boot + + + + Enable traffic accounting + + + + Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager + + + + In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is Allow +access point roaming which give the possibility to switch +automatically between access point according to the signal strength. + + + + With the advanced button, you can specify: + + + + Metric (10 by default) + + + + MTU + + + + חיבור "חם" לרשת + + + + אפשור tunnel מ-IPv6 ל-IPv4 + + + + The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start +immediately or not. + + + + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fb92a0d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +
+ + פתיחת מסוף כמנהל המערכת + + drakconsole + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakconsole as root. + gives you access to a console +which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more +information about that. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..092264d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +
+ + + + ניהול מחיצות הכונן + + drakdisk or diskdrake + + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakdisk or diskdrake as root. + is very powerful, a tiny +error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a +partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll +see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on +Exit if you're not sure you want to continue. + + + If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you +want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc). + + + + + + + + You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your +preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, +resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a +partition: it is all possible. The Clear +all button at the bottom is to erase the complete +disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a +partition. + + + + + + If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called "EFI System +Partition" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it contains +all your different operating systems bootloaders. + + + If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot +choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition +must be unmounted first. + + It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side + + To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to +delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button +Create appears when a disk empty part is +selected + + You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created. + + + + + + + + Selecting Toggle to expert mode +gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be +seen in the screenshot below. + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67ec61ae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +
+ + + +הגדרת מנהל ההפעלה + drakedm + + + + + + + HereYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakedm as root. you can choose which display +manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available +on your system will be shown. + Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look +different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM +is a lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e5fd686 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +
+ + הגדרת חומת־האש האישית שלך + + drakfirewall + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakfirewall as root. + is found under the Security +tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal +firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system +security, permissions and audit". + + A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming +connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the +first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection +attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - +Everything (no firewall) - unless you want to disable +the firewall, and only check the needed services. + + It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on +Advanced and a new window is opened. In the field +Other ports, enter the needed ports following these +examples : + + 80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol + + 24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol + + The listed ports should be separated by a space. + + If the box Log firewall messages in system logs is +checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs + + + + + + + + + If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) +it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even +recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet. + + + The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature +allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box +Use Interactive Firewall is checked. Check the second +box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure +somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards +corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot +below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be +warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports. + + These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the +Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary +packages are downloaded. + + + If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & +Internet, icon Set up a new network interface. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f5604b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +
+ + ניהול, הוספה והסרת גופנים. ייבוא גופני חלונות (שם רשום) + + drakfont + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakfont as root. + is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the System tab. It +allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen +above shows: + + + + the installed font names, styles and sizes. + + + + a preview of the selected font. + + + + some buttons explained here later. + + + + + + Get Windows Fonts: + + This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You +must have Microsoft Windows installed. + + Options: + + It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able +to use the fonts. + + הסרה: + + This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be +careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the +documents that use them. + + ייבוא: + + Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The +supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the +Import button and then on Add, a file manager pops up where you can select the +fonts to install, click on Install when +done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts. + + If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont +main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f1bce2a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +
+ + בקרת הורים + + drakguard + + + + + + + + + This tool + ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת drakguard כמשתמש על (root). + is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled Parental +Control. If you don't see this label, you have to install the +drakguard package (not installed by default). + +
+ הצגה + + Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to +restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three +useful capabilities: + + + + It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by +controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia. + + + + It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can +only execute what you accept them to execute. + + + + It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through +blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the +website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental +control blocker DansGuardian. + + +
+ +
+ הגדרת בקרת הורים + + + If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, +Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on +your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel +feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named +users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by +an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this +prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will +then suggest you reboot. + Enable parental control: If checked, the parental +control is enabled and the access to Block programs tab +is opened. + + Block all network traffic: If checked, all the +websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all +the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab. + + User access: Users on the left hand side will have +their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the +right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are +not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on +Add to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an +user in the right hand side and click on Remove to +remove him/her from the allowed users. + + Time control: If checked, internet access is allowed +with restrictions between the Start time and +End time. It is totally blocked outside these time +window. + +
+ לשונית רשימת הדחייה/ההתרה + + Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the +Add button. +
+ +
+ Block Programs Tab + + Block Defined Applications: Enables the use of ACL to +restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the +applications you wish to block. + + Unblock Users list: Users listed on the right hand +side will not be subject to acl blocking. +
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..314cfd85 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + +
+ + שיתוף הקישור לאינטרנט עם מחשבים אחרים ברשת מקומית + + drakgw + + + + + + + + + + +
+ עקרונות + + + + + + This is useful when you have a +computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local +network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to +other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the +gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card +must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to +the Internet (2). + + The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are +set up, as documented in . +
+ +
+ אשף שער הגישה + + The wizard + ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת drakgw כמשתמש על (root). + offers successive steps +which are shown below: + + + + If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this +and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware. + + + + specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard +automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that +what is proposed is correct. + + + + specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes +one, check that this is correct. + + + + The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask +and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual +configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values. + + + + specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard +will check that bind is installed. Otherwise, you have to +specify the address of a DNS server. + + + + specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard +will check that dhcp-server is installed and offer to configure +it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range. + + + + specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard +will check that squid is installed and offer to configure it, +with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the +proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb). + + + + The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to +printers and to share them. + + + + You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active. +
+ +
+ Configure the client + + If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to +specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address +automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting +to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is +using. + + If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular +specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the +gateway. +
+ +
+ Stop connection sharing + + If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch +the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the +sharing. +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e708636 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +
+ + הגדרת מארחים + + drakhosts + + + + + + + + + If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed +IP-addresses, this tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakhosts as root. + allows to +specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name +instead of the IP-address. + + Add + + With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window +to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an +alias which can be used in the same way that the name is. + + Modify + + You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the +same window. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2eed030c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +
+ + הגדרות מתקדמות למנשקי הרשת וחומת־האשdrakinvictus + + + + + + + + + This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakinvictus as root. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac4f21e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +
+ + + + + +מרכז הרשת + draknetcenter + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing draknetcenter as root. is found under the Network +& Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center" + +
+ מבוא + When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks +configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, +etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending +on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its +settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a +network, for this see Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, +ADSL, ...) in the same MCC tab. + In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the +first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon (this one is not connected ) and the second section shows wireless +networks, not connected recognizable by this icon and this one if connected. For the other network types, +the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not +connected. + In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected +networks, with the SSID, the Signal +strengh, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and +the Operating mode. Click on the chosen one and then +either on Monitor, Configure +or Connect. It is possible here to go from a network +to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings +window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption +key in particular). + Click on Refresh to update the screen. + + + + + +
+
+ The Monitor button + + + + + + This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the +PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is +available by right clicking on the Internet icon in the system tray +-> Monitor Network. + There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the +local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which +gives details about connection status. + + At the bottom of the window is a title Traffic +accounting, we will look at that in the next section. + +
+
+ The Configure button + A - For a wired network + + + + + + It is possible to change all the settings given during network +creation. Most of the time, checking Automatic IP +(BOOTP/DHCP) will do, but in case of problems, manual +configuration may give better results. + For a residential network, the IP address always looks +like 192.168.0.x, Netmask is 255.255.255.0, and the +Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your providers website. + Enable traffic accounting if checked this will count +the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in +the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may +have to reconnect to the network. + Allow interface to be controlled by Network +Manager: + This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + The button Advanced: + This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + + + + + + B - For a wireless network + Only the items not already seen above are explained. + + + + + + Operating mode: + Select Managed if the connection is via an access +point, there is an ESSID detected. Select +Ad-hoc if it is a peer to peer network. Select +Master if your network card is used as the +access point, your network card needs to support this mode. + Encryption mode and Encryption key: + If it is a private network, you need to know these settings. + WEP uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a +passphrase. WPA Pre-Shared Key is also called WPA +personal or WPA home. WPA Enterprise is not often used +in private networks. + Allow access point roaming: + Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access +point while remaining connected to the network. + The button Advanced: + This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + + + + + +
+
+ The Advanced Settings button + This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + + + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edb669ef --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ + + +
+ + + ניהול פרופילי רשת שונים + Draknetprofile + + +
+ מבוא + + Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix +set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a +desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between +various network environments: having the system run in different network +environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given +network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each +time the network environment changes. + +
+ פרופילים + + Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a +standard feature. The notion of a "network +profile" refers to a set of configurations of network devices, +defined for a specific network environment. Each network profile has a +name - the initial configuration that comes +out of system generation has the name "default"; when a +new profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all +already existing profile names. +
+ +
+ Draknetprofile + + Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center +(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing +profiles. This GUI allows to + + + + + switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the +"current profile", + + + + create a new, additional profile, + + + + delete a profile from the list of defined profiles. + + + +
+
+ +
+ Running Draknetprofile + +
+ Defining profiles, profile switching + + Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its +users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, +launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root): + + + + + + + Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & +Internet tab + + + + + + + launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop, + + + + select the "Network & Internet" tab, + + + + hit "Manage different network profiles" in the "Personalize and Secure your +network" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1). + + + + Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a +terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when +standard-output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - +for instance for debugging). Simply type: + + + + + + +  draknetprofile  + + + + + + After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed: + + + + + + + Figure 2: Management actions of +Draknetprofile + + + + The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently +defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons: + + + + + "Activate" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as +the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile); + + + + "New" ... create a new profile; + + + + "Delete" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles; + + + + "Quit" ... exit from Draknetprofile. + + + + Before hitting the "Activate" or the "Delete" button, you have to select a +profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the +target profile. + + Hitting the "New" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can type +the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different from +any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise copy +of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the current +profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties (modify the +automatically created configuration) in a second, independent action: + + + + + exit from Draknetprofile (hit the "Quit" button), + + + + back in the "Network & Internet" tab, you select the tab "Set up a new +network interface (...)" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1), + + + + you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are +similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during +system generation - as documented in the Drakconnect manual. + + + + The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the "Advanced" button +to make it visible. It should display the list of names of Draknetprofile +"modules" (such as "network", "firewall", +"urpmi"), each with a check-button next to the name; these check-buttons +determine whether the properties controlled by that module are included into +the profile or not. +
+ +
+ Using a system that has more than one profile + + In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user +interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the +bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you +will get a message like + + + + + + +  Select network profile: (1) default (2) +roaming*  + + + + + + Type 1 or 2 to select the "default", respectively the "roaming" profile, or +carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk (the +profile that was active when the system had been shut down). + + Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens +that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a +profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This +problem is under investigation. +
+
+ +
+ Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile + + The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory +/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/, in files with names +like ifcfg-xxx. + + The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file +/etc/netprofile/current . + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..192eb7c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ + +
+ + שיתוף כוננים וספריות בעזרת NFS + + draknfs + + + + + + + + + + +
+ Prerequisites + + When the wizard + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing draknfs as root. + is launched for the +first time, it may display the following message: + +
+ The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it? +
+ + After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed. +
+ +
+ Main window + + A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list +is empty. The Add button gives access to a +configuration tool. +
+ +
+ שינוי מובאה + + The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched +with the Modify button. The following parameters are +available. + + + + + + + +
+ NFS Directory + + Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The +Directory button gives access to a browser to choose +it. +
+ +
+ גישת מארח + + Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared +directory. + + NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways: + + single host: a host either by an abbreviated name +recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address + + netgroups: NIS netgroups may be given as @group. + + wildcards: machine names may contain the wildcard +characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the +domain cs.foo.edu. + + IP networks: you can also export directories to all +hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either +`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address. +
+ +
+ מיפוי זהוי משתמש + + map root user as anonymous: maps requests from uid/gid +0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client +cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on +the server itself. + + allow real remote root access: turn off root +squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients +(no_root_squash). + + map all users to anonymous user: maps all uids and gids +to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP +directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID +mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting. + + anonuid and anongid: explicitly set the uid and gid of +the anonymous account. +
+ +
+ הגדרות מתקדמות + + Secured Connection: this option requires that requests +originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option +is on by default. + + Read-Only share: allow either only read or both read +and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any +request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by +using this option. + + Synchronous access: prevents the NFS server from +violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made +by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive). + + Subtree checking: enable subtree checking which can +help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See +exports(5) man page for more details. +
+
+ +
+ Menu entries + + So far the list has at least one entry. + + + + + + + +
+ File|Write conf + + Save the current configuration. +
+ +
+ NFS Server|Restart + + The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files. +
+ +
+ NFS Server|Reload + + The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files. +
+
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc7487cf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + +
+ + שרת מתווך (Proxy) + + drakproxy + + + + + + + + + If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use +this tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakproxy as root. + to configure it. Your net +administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify +some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception. + + From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a +proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as +an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control their complexity. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f335fa3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +
+ + Configure Media + + drakrpm-edit-media + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as +repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources +to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button +below). + + If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a +USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media +used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new +packages, you should disable (or delete) this media.  (It will have the +media type CD-Rom). + + Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called +i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether +your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They +don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both +the i586 and the x86_64 media. + + + This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab Software management. + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakrpm-edit-media as root. + + +
+ The columns + + Column Enable: + + The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with +some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable. + + Column Update: + + The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only +media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, +this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root +and type drakrpm-edit-media --expert. + + Column medium: + + Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release +versions contain at least: + + + + Core which contains most programs available +supported by Mageia. + + + + Nonfree which contains some programs which +are not free + + + + Tainted free software for which there might +be patent claims in some countries. + + Each medium has 4 sub-sections: + + + + Release the packages as of the day the this +version of Mageia was released. + + + + Updates the packages updated since release +due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled, +even with a very slow internet connection. + + + + Backports some packages of new versions +backported from Cauldron (the next version under development). + + + + Testing which is used for temporary tests +of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the +corrections. + + +
+ +
+ The buttons on the right + + Remove: + + To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to +remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since +all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium. + + Edit: + + Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and +proxy). + + Add: + + Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories +contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button +adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that +you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a +specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from +the drop-down "File" menu. + + Up and down arrows: + + Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list +in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same +release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will +be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top. +
+ +
+ The menu + + File -> Update: + + A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and +click on the Update button. + + File -> Add a specific media mirror: + + Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's +too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the +actual media and click on Remove to take them +out. Click on File -> Add a specific media mirror, choose +between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the +Full set of sources) and accept the contact by +clicking on Yes. This window opens: + + + + + + + + You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very +close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available +mirrors in that country. Select one and click on OK. + + File -> Add a custom medium: + + It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that +isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears: + + + + + + Select the medium type, find a smart +name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to +the medium type) + + Options -> Global options: + + This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always +or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the +download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-, +update only, always or never). + + Options -> Manage keys: + + To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate +the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the +window that appear, select a medium and then click on +Add to allow a new key or to select a key and click +on Remove to disallow that key. + + + Do this with care, as with all security-related questions + Options -> Proxy: + + If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it +here. You only need to give the Proxy hostname and if +necessary a Username and Password. + + + + For more information about configuring the media, see the Mageia Wiki +page. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..444986d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +
+ + Share directories and drives with Samba + + draksambashare + + + + + + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some +resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure +the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is +also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the +resources of the Samba server. +
+ +
+ Preparation + + To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP +address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with +, or at the DHCP server which identifies the +station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The +firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server. + + +
+ +
+ Wizard - Standalone server + + At the first run, the tools + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing draksambashare as root. + checks if +needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not +yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched. + + + + + + + + In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already +selected. + + + + + + + + Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the +access to the shared resources. + + The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on +the network. + + + + + + + + Choose the security mode: + + + + user: the client must be authorized to access the +resource + + + + share: the client authenticates itself separately for +each share + + + + You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP +address or host name. + + + + + + + + Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be +described in the Windows workstations. + + + + + + + + The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step. + + + + + + + + The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the +configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in +/etc/samba/smb.conf. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Wizard - Primary domain controller + + + + + + If the "Primary domain controller" +option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or +not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same +as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode: + + + + domain: provides a mechanism for storing all user and +group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized +account repository is shared between (security) controllers. + + +
+ +
+ Declare a directory to share + + With the Add button, we get: + + + + + + + + A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the +Modify button. Options can be edited, such as whether +the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share +name can not be modified. + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Menu entries + + When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used. + + + File|Write conf + + Save the current configuration in /etc/samba/smb.conf. + + + + Samba server|Configure + + The wizard can be run again with this command. + + + + Samba server|Restart + + The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files. + + + + Samba Server|Reload + + The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files. + +
+ +
+ Printers share + + Samba also allows you to share printers. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Samba users + + In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared +resources when authentication is required. You can add users from + + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecec7b56 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +
+ + הגדרת אימות לכלים של Mageia + + draksec + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing draksec as root. + is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab Security + + It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks +usually done by the administrator. + + Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down: + + + + + + + + + Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in +the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a +drop down list on the right side gives the choice between: + + + + Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the +same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit". + + + + User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching. + + + + Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching + + + + No password: The tool is launched without asking any password. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ae20c91 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + +
+ + תמונות מערכת + draksnapshot-config + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing draksnapshot-config as root. is available in MCC's +System tab, in the Administration +tools section. + When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message +about installing draksnapshot. Click on Install to +proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed. + + Click again on Snapshots, you will see the +Settings screen. Tick Enable +Backups and, if you want to backup the whole system, +Backup the whole system. + If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose +Advanced. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the +Add and Remove buttons next to +the Backup list to include or exclude directories and +files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the +Exclude list to remove subdirectories and/or files from +the chosen directories, that should not be +included in the backup. Click on Close when you are +done. + Now give the path to Where to backup, or choose the +Browse button to select the correct path. Any mounted +USB-key or external HD can be found in /run/media/your_user_name/. + + Click on Apply to make the snapshot. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a51c647 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +
+ + הגדרות קול + draksound + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing draksound as root. is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab Hardware. + Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and +troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you +change the sound card. + PulseAudio is a sound server. It receives all the sound +inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting +sound to the output. See Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio +volume control to set these preferences. + PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it +enabled. + Glitch-Free improves PulseAudio with some programs. It +is also recommended to leave it enabled. + The Troubleshooting button gives assistance with +fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this +before asking the community for help. + The Advanced button displays a new window with an +obvious button. + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c976c872 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +
+ + הגדרת אל־פסק למעקב אחר צריכת החשמלdrakups + + + + + + + + + This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + + + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakups as root. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b89366fb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +
+ + Configure VPN Connection to secure network access + + drakvpn + + + + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakvpn as root. + allows to configure secure +access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local +workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the +configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is +already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the +network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file . +
+ +
+ הגדרות + + First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which +protocol is used for your virtual private network. + + Then give your connection a name. + + At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection. + + + + For Cisco VPN + + + + + + + + + + + + For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the +first time the tool is used. + + + + + + Select the files that you received +from the network administrator. + + Advanced parameters: + + + + + + + + The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway. + + + + When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN +connection. + + This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network +connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect +to this VPN. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..adc1026c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +
+ + Configure webserverdrakwizard apache2 + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard apache2 as root. can help you to set up a web +server. + +
+ מהו שרת רשת? + + Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be +accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + +
+
+ Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2 + + Welcome to the web server wizard. + + + + מבוא + + + + + + + The first page is just an introduction, click Next. + + + + Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World + + + + + + + Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + + + + Server User Module + + + + + + + Allows users to create their own sites. + + + + User web directory name + + + + + + + The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will +display it. + + + + Server Document Root + + + + + + + Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents. + + + + סיכום + + + + + + + Take a second to check these options, then click +Next. + + + + סיום + + + + + + + You're done! Click Finish. + + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e687f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +
+ + הגדרת DNSdrakwizard bind + + + + + + + + + This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + + + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard bind as root. +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47c20571 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +
+ + הגדרת DHCP + + drakwizard dhcp + + + + + + + + + + This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net +interfaces + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard dhcp as root. + can help you to set up a +DHCP server. It is a component of drakwizard which should +be installed before you can access to it. + +
+ What is DHCP? + + The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a +standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically +configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet +communication. (From Wikipedia) +
+ +
+ Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp + + Welcome to the DHCP server wizard. + + + + מבוא + + + + + + + + The first page is just an introduction, click Next. + + + + Selecting Adaptor + + + + + + + + Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for +which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click +Next. + + + + Select IP range + + + + + + + + Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want +the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to +some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then +click Next. + + + + סיכום + + + + + + + + Take a second to check these options, then click +Next. + + + + Hold on... + + + + + + + + This can be fixed. Click Previous a few times and +change things around. + + + + Hours later... + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ What is done + + + + Installing the package dhcp-server if needed; + + + + Saving /etc/dhcpd.conf in /etc/dhcpd.conf.orig; + + + + Creating a new dhcpd.conf starting from +/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default and +adding the new parameters: + + + + hname + + + + dns + + + + net + + + + ip + + + + mask + + + + rng1 + + + + rng2 + + + + dname + + + + gateway + + + + tftpserverip + + + + dhcpd_interface + + + + + + Also modifying Webmin configuration file +/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config + + + + dhcpd מופעל מחדש. + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..674fe393 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + +
+ + הגדרת זמן + + drakwizard ntp + + + + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard ntp as root. + purpose is to set the time of +your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by +default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base +packages. + +
+ Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp + + + + After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three +time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice +because this server always points to available time servers. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you +arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it +using the Previousbutton. If everything is right, +click on the Next button to proceed to the test. It +may take a while and you finally get this screen below: + + + + + + + + + + Click on the Finish button to close the tool + + + + +
+ +
+ What is done + + This tool executes the following steps: + + + + Installing the package ntp if needed + + + + Saving the files /etc/sysconfig/clock to +/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig and +/etc/ntp/step-tickers to +/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig; + + + + Writing a new file /etc/ntp/step-tickers with the list of +servers; + + + + Modifying the file /etc/ntp.conf by inserting the first server +name; + + + + Stopping and starting crond, atd and +ntpd services; + + + + Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference. + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4ae9d18 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +
+ + הגדרת FTPdrakwizard proftpd + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard proftpd as root. can help you to set up an +FTP server. + +
+ What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>? + + File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a standard network +protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a +TCP-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + +
+
+ Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd + + Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up. + + + + מבוא + + + + + + + The first page is just an introduction, click Next. + + + + Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World + + + + + + + Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + + + + Server Information + + + + + + + Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email +complaints too and whether to allow root login access. + + + + Server Options + + + + + + + Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or FXP +(File eXchange Protocol) + + + + סיכום + + + + + + + Take a second to check these options, then click +Next. + + + + סיום + + + + + + + You're done! Click Finish. + + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c69d928a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ + +
+ + הגדרת שרת מתווך + + drakwizard squid + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard squid as root. + can help you to set up a +proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed +before you can access to it. + +
+ What is a proxy server? + + A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts +as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia) +
+ +
+ Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid + + Welcome to the proxy server wizard. + + + + מבוא + + + + + + + + The first page is just an introduction, click Next. + + + + Selecting the proxy port + + + + + + + + Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click +Next. + + + + Set Memory and Disk Usage + + + + + + + + Set memory and disk cache limits, then click Next. + + + + Select Network Access Control + + + + + + + + Set visibility to local network or world, then click +Next. + + + + Grant Network Access + + + + + + + + Grant access to local networks, then click Next. + + + + Use Upper Level Proxy Server? + + + + + + + + Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step. + + + + Upper Level Proxy URL and Port + + + + + + + + Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click +Next. + + + + סיכום + + + + + + + + Take a second to check these options, then click +Next. + + + + Start during boot? + + + + + + + + Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then +click Next. + + + + סיום + + + + + + + + You're done! Click Finish. + + +
+ +
+ What is done + + + + Installing the package squid if needed; + + + + Saving /etc/squid/squid.conf in +/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig; + + + + Creating a new squid.conf starting from +squid.conf.default and adding the new parameters: + + + + cache_dir + + + + localnet + + + + cache_mem + + + + http_port + + + + level 1, 2 or 3 and http_access according to level + + + + cache_peer + + + + visible_hostname + + + + + + Restarting squid. + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c260558 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +
+ + הגדרת תוכנת הרקע OpenSSHdrakwizard sshd + + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakwizard sshd as root. can help you to set up an +SSH daemon. + +
+ What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>? + + Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data +communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and +other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, +via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client +(running SSH server and SSH client programs, +respectively). (From Wikipedia) + +
+
+ Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd + + Welcome to the Open SSH wizard. + + + + Select Type of Configure Options + + + + + + + Choose Expert for all options or +Newbie to skip steps 3-7, click +Next. + + + + אפשרויות כלליות + + + + + + + Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard +SSH port. + + + + Authentication Methods + + + + + + + Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, +then click Next. + + + + Logging + + + + + + + Choose logging facility and level of output, then click +Next. + + + + Login Options + + + + + + + Configure per-login settings, then click Next. + + + + User Login Options + + + + + + + Configure the user access settings, then click Next. + + + + Compression and Forwarding + + + + + + + Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click +Next. + + + + סיכום + + + + + + + Take a second to check these options, then click +Next. + + + + סיום + + + + + + + You're done! Click Finish. + + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..682df18c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +
+ + ניהול שירותי המערכת על ידי הפעלתם או ניטרולם + drakxservices + + + + + + + This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Doc +team. Thanking you in advance. + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing drakxservices as root. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..767e97e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + +
+ + Hardware configuration + + harddrake2 + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing harddrake2 as root. + gives a general view of the +hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to +look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command +ldetect which refers to a list of hardware in +ldetect-lst package. + +
+ The window + + The window is divided in two columns. + + The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are +grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a +category. Each device can be selected in this column. + + The right column displays information about the selected device. The +Help -> Fields description gives some information +about the content of the fields. + + According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are +available at the bottom of the right column: + + + + Set current driver options: this can be used to +parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must +used by experts only. + + + + Run config tool: access to the tool which can +configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC. + + + + +
+ +
+ The menu + + אפשרויות + + The options menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to +enable automatic detection: + + + + modem + + + + Jaz devices + + + + Zip parallel devices + + By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check +the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will +be operational the next time this tool is started. +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23fa6c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +
+ + Set up the Keyboard Layout + + + + +מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake) + + + + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + כלי מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake) + ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה, באמצעות כתיבת keyboarddrakeas root. + עוזר לך +בהגדרת הפריסה הבסיסית למקלדת שבה ברצונך להשתמש ב־Mageia. הוא משפיע על פריסת +המקלדת עבור כל המשתמשים במערכת. ניתן למצוא אותו במקטע החומרה של מרכז הבקרה +של Mageia בשם "הגדרת עכבר ומקלדת". +
+ +
+ פריסת מקלדת + + Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed +in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each +layout should be used for. +
+ +
+ סוג מקלדת + + This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are +unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f2de83b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + +
+ + ניהול התאמה למיקום של המערכת שלך + + localedrake + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can also start this tool from the command line, by typing localedrake as root. + can be found in the System +section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for +your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your +language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation. + + The Advanced button give access to activate +compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8). + + The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected +language. The button Other Countries gives access to +countries not listed. + + You have to restart your session after any modifications. + +
+ + Input method + + In the Other Countries screen you can also select an +input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input +methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, +Korean, etc). + For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so +users should not need to configure it manually. + Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions +and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another +part of the Mageia Control Center. See . +
+ +
+ diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ca3104c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +
+ + עיון וחיפוש ברישומי מערכת + + logdrake + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing logdrake as root. + is found in the Mageia +Control Center System tab, labelled "View and search system +logs". + + + +
+ To do a search in the logs + + First, enter the key string you want to look for in the Matching field and/or the key string you want to +do not wish to see amongst the answers in the field +but not matching. Then select the file(s) +to search in the Choose file field. Optionally, it is +possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the Calendar, using the little arrows on each side of the +month and year, and check "Show only for the selected +day". At last, click on the search button +to see the results in the window called Content of the +file. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by +clicking on the Save button. + + + The Mageia Tools Logs houses the logs from the Mageia +configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are +updated each time a configuration is modified. + +
+ +
+ To configure a mail alert + + Mail alert automatically checks the system load and +the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured +address. + + To configure this tool, click on the Mail +Alert button and then, in the next screen, on the +Configure the mail alert system drop down button. Here, all the +running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to +look watch. (See screenshot above). + + The following services can be watched : + + + + שירות Webmin + + + + שרת הדוא"ל של Postfix + + + + שרת FTP + + + + שרת WWW של APACHI + + + + שרת SSH + + + + שרת סמבה + + + + שירות Xinetd + + + + BIND Domain Name Resolve + + + + + + + + + + In the next screen, select the Load value you consider +unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows +the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone +out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value +to 3 times the number of processors. + + In the last screen, enter the Email address of the +person to be warned and the Email server to use (local +or on the Internet). +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e2d554d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +
+ + Display Available NFS And SMB Shares + lsnetdrake + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing lsnetdrake. + + can only be started and used +on the command line. + + This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact the Documentation +team. Thanking you in advance. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4585125 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +
+ + Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information + + lspcidrake + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing lspcidrake. + can only be started and used +on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root. + + lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, +PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst +packages to work. + + + + + + + + With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications. + + lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it +is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples: + + Information about the graphic card; + + lspcidrake | grep VGA + + Information about the network + + lspcidrake | grep -i network + + -i to ignore case distinctions. + + In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for +lspcidrake and the -i option for grep. + + + + + + + + There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is +called dmidecode (under root) +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7bea08d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + +
+ + אתחול + + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot +steps. Click on a link below to learn more. + + + הגדרות שלבי האתחול + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76c0a07c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + +
+ + חומרה + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your +hardware. Click on a link below to learn more. + + + + + ניהול חומרה + + = Browse and configure +hardware + + + + + + + + + + + הגדרות גרפיקה + + = Configure 3D Desktop effects + + + + + + + + + + + הגדרות עכבר ומקלדת + + + + + + + + + + + + + הגדרות הדפסה וסריקה + + = Set up the printer(s), +the print job queues, ... + + + + + + + + + + + שונות + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37b30525 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + +
About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center + + + The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to +choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was +installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be +selected in the big right panel. + + The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related +tools. + +The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in +any of the MCC tabs. + + The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool +screens. + + There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on +the "Search" tab in the left column. + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bfa4f62d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + +
+ + + כוננים מקומיים + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your +local disks. Click on a link below to learn more. + + כוננים מקומיים + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..771e263b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +
+ + רשת ואינטרנט + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link +below to learn more. + + + + + הגדרות התקני רשת + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + הגדרות פרטיות ואבטחה ברשת + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + שונות + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ba56a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + +
+ + שרותי רשת + + + + + + + + + This screen and the one for Sharing are only visible if +the drakwizard package is installed. You can choose +between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or +on to learn more. + + שרותי רשת + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c2cb525 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + +
+ + שיתופי רשת + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and +directories. Click on a link below to learn more. + + + + הגדרות שיתופי וינדוז + + = Share drives and +directories with Windows (SMB) systems + + + הגדרות שיתופי NFS + + + + + הגדרות שיתופי WebDAV + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dca3b430 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + +
+ + הגדרות אבטחה + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a +link below to learn more. + + הגדרות אבטחה + + = Configure system security, permissions +and audit + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9d1d6ee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + +
+ + שיתוף + + + + + + + + + This screen and the one for Network Services are only +visible if the drakwizard package is installed. You can +choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link +below or on to learn more. + + שיתוף + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e9e19f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +
+ + מערכת + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several system and administration +tools. Click on a link below to learn more. + + + + הגדרות שירותי המערכת + + + + + + + + + + + + + + התאמה למקום + + + + + + + + + + + כלי ניהול + + + + + + + + = Manage users on system + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9dc9f6b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +
+ + הגדרת תדירות העדכונים + + mgaapplet-config + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing mgaapplet-config as root. + is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab Software +management. It is also available by a right click / +Updates configuration on the red icon + + + + in the system tray. + + + + The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for +updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The +check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is +out. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ef5bc2b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +
+ + הגדרת התקן הצבעה (עכבר, לוח מגע) + + mousedrake + + + + + + + + + This toolYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing mousedrake as root. is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab Hardware. + + As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by +Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse. + + The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse +and click on OK. Most of the time "Universal / Any +PS/2 & USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is +immediately taken into account. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8306b558 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +
+ + MSEC: System Security and Audit + + msecgui + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ הצגה + + msecguiYou can start this tool from the command line, by typing msecgui as root. + is a graphic user interface for +msec that allows to configure your system security according to two +approaches: + + + + It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to +make it more secure. + + + + It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn +you if something seems dangerous. + + + + msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a +set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or +enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your +own customised security levels. +
+ +
+ Overview tab + + See the screenshot above + + The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a +button on the right side to configure them: + + + + Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall + + + + Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system + + + + msec itself with some information: + + + + enabled or not + + + + the configured Base security level + + + + the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report +and another button to execute the checks just now. + + + + +
+ +
+ Security settings tab + + A click on the second tab or on the Security +Configure button leads to the same screen shown +below. + + + + + + + + +
+ Basic security tab + + + Security levels: + + + After having checked the box Enable MSEC tool, this tab +allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then +in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The +following levels are available: + + + + Level none. This level is intended if you +do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on +your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or +constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only +if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system +vulnerable to attack. + + + + Level standard. This is the default +configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It +constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which +detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory +permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec +versions). + + + + Level secure. This level is intended when +you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts +system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to +the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and +5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions). + + + + Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, +such as the fileserver , webserver and netbook levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure +system security according to the most common use cases. + + + + The last two levels called audit_daily and +audit_weekly are not really security levels +but rather tools for periodic checks only. + + + + These levels are saved in +/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname>. You can define +your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called +level.<levelname>, placed into the folder +/etc/security/msec/. This function is intended for +power users which require a customised or more secure system configuration. + + + Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default +level settings. + + + + Security alerts: + + + If you check the box Send security alerts by email +to:, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent +by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You +can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail +and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive +the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to +enable it. + + + It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to +immediately inform the security administrator of possible security +problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs +files available in /var/log/security. + + Security options: + + Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer +security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change +any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in +/etc/security/msec/security.conf. This file contains +the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done +to the options. +
+ +
+ System security tab + + This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a +description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side +column. + + + + + + + + To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see +screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the +actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be +selected. Click on the OK button to validate the +choice. + + + + + + + + + Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration +using the menu File -> Save the configuration. If you +have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before +saving them. + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Network security + + This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Periodic checks tab + + Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of +security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous. + + This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency +if the box Enable periodic security checks is +checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ Exceptions tab + + Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In +these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab +allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert +messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot +below shows four exceptions. + + + + + + + + To create an exception, click on the Add a rule +button + + + + + + + + Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called +Check and then, enter the +Exception in the text area. Adding an exception is +obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the +Delete button of the Exceptions +tab or modify it with a double clicK. +
+ +
+ הרשאות + This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and +enforcement. + Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, +secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security +level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them +into specific files called perm.<levelname> placed +into the folder /etc/security/msec/ . This function is +intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is +also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission +you want. Current configuration is stored in +/etc/security/msec/perms.conf. This file contains the +list of all the modifications done to the permissions. + + + + + + Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You +can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the +owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a +given rule: + + + the box Enforce is not checked, msec only checks if the +defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message +if not, but does not change anything. + + + + the box Enforce is checked, then msec will rule the +permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the +permissions. + + For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the Periodic check tab must be configured accordingly.To create a new rule, click on the Add a rule button +and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in +the File field. “current” means no modification. + + + + + + Click on the OK button to validate the choice and do +not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the +menu File -> Save the configuration. If you have changed +the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. + It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the +configuration file /etc/security/msec/perms.conf. + + Changes in the Permission tab (or directly +in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic +check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the Periodic +checks tab). If you want them to be taken immediately into +account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can +use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be +changed by msecperms. + Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file +manager, for a file where the box Enforce is checked +in the Permissions tab , msecgui will write +the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of +the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the Periodic Checks tab . +
+
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f08bc5f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + +
+ + Other Mageia Tools + + + There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia +Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the +next pages. + + + + drakbug + + + + + drakbug_report + + + + TO BE WRITTEN + + + + + + + And more tools? + + + + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64d2fe59 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +
+ + + Software Management (Install and Remove Software) + + rpmdrake + + + + + + + + + + +
+ Introduction to rpmdrake + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing rpmdrake as root. + , also known as drakrpm, is a +program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the +graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online +package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official +servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages +available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only +certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by +default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed +packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries +of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names +included in the packages. + + To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with . + + + During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for +the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake +will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window +: + + + + If the above message annoys you +and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit, +it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories +thanks to . + + Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more +packages, and allow to update your installed packages. + +
+ +
+ The main parts of the screen + + + + + + + + + + + Package type filter: + + This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first +time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical +interface. You can display either all the packages and all their +dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, +updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia. + + + The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who +probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading +this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge +of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All". + + + + + Package state filter: + + + This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the +packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and +not installed. + + + + Search mode: + + Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their +summaries, through their complete description or through the files included +in the packages. + + + + "Find" box: + + Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword +for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and +"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'. + + + + Erase all: + + This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box +. + + + + Categories list: + + This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and +sub categories. + + + + Description panel: + + This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete +description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It +can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the +package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer. + + +
+ +
+ The status column + + Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by +category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A +list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium +is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is +installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or +uncheck the box before the package name and click on +Apply. + + + + + <tgroup align="left" cols="2"> + <colspec align="center"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry align="center">סמל</entry> + + <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table></para> + + <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status +icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking +on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange +with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when +clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The dependencies + + + + + + + + + Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They +are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an +information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected +dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It +may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed +library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a +button to get more information and another button to choose which package to +install. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d736d36a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,259 @@ + +
+ + הגדרת סורק + scannerdrake + + + + +
+ + התקנה + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +scannerdrake as root. + allows you to configure a +single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It +also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a +remote computer or to access remote scanners. + + When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following +message: + + "SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners + + Do you want to install the SANE packages?" + + Choose Yes to continue. It will install +scanner-gui and task-scanning if they are not yet +installed. + + + + + + + + If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see +the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, +XSane or Simple Scan. + + In that case, you might now want to want to configure the Scanner +sharing option. You can read about it in the . + + + However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its +cable(s) and power switch and then pressing Search for new +scanners doesn't help, you'll need to press Add a +scanner manually. + + Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the +list for that brand and click Ok + + + + + + + + + If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click +Cancel + + Please check whether your scanner is supported on the SANE: +Supported Devices page and ask for help in the forums. + + +
+ + Choose port + + + + +
+ + You can leave this setting to Auto-detect available +ports unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that +case, select /dev/parport0 if you have only one. + + After clicking Ok, in most cases you will see a screen +similar to the one below. +If you don't get that screen, then please read the . + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + Scannersharing + + + + + + + + + Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be +accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also +decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on +this machine. + + Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or +deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on +this computer. + + Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted +from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner. + + + + + + + + Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host. + + + + + + + + Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote +machines. + + + + + + + + "All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner. + + + + + + + + If the package saned is not yet installed, the tool +offers to do it. + + At the end, the tool will alter these files: + + /etc/sane.d/saned.conf + + /etc/sane.d/net.conf + + /etc/sane.d/dll.conf to add or comment the directive +"net" + + It will also configure saned and +xinetd to be started on boot. +
+ +
+ + Specifics + + + + + + Hewlett-Packard + + Most HP scanners are managed from HP Device Manager +(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow +you to configure it and invites you to use HP Device +Manager. + + + + Epson + + Drivers are available from this +page. When indicated, you must install the +iscan-data package first, then +iscan (in this order). It is possible that the +iscan package will generate a warning about a conflict +with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be +ignored. + + + +
+ +
+ + Extra installation steps + + + It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the screen, you need to take one or more extra +steps to correctly configure your scanner. + + + + +In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded +each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, +after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the +firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you +downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor. + When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at +each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient. + + + +Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the +/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file. + + + +Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know +what to do, feel free to ask for help in the forums. + + + + +
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a8737a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + +
+ + ניהול תוכנה + + + + + + + + + In this screen you can choose between several tools for software +management. Click on a link below to learn more. + ניהול תוכנה + + + + + = Update your +system + + + + + + = Configure media +sources for install and update + + + + + + + + + +
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..533f6a33 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +
+ + + + + + + +Install and configure a printer + + system-config-printer + + + + + + + + +
+ מבוא + + Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own configuration +interface which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia +offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer +which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu +and openSUSE. + + You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the +installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way. + + Printer installation is carried out in the Hardware +section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the Configure +printing and scanning tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +system-config-printer. The root password will be asked +for. + . + + MCC will ask for the installation two packages: + +
+ task-printing-server + + task-printing-hp +
+ + It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of +dependencies are needed. + + To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to +detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a +printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a +printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window +will also attempt to configure a network printer. +
+ +
+ Automatically detected printer + + This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the +name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click +"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be +automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known +drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the +next paragraph. Continue with +
+ +
+ No automatically detected printer + + + + + + + + When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window +to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following +options. + + + + Select printer from database + + + + + + provide PPD file + + + + + + search for a driver to download + + + + By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer +first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one +driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have +encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one +which know to work. +
+ +
+ Complete the installation process + + After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will +allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is +the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of +available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After +this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available +printers. +
+ +
+ Network printer + + Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or +wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to +another workstation that serves as printserver. + + + Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed +IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same +as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed +one. + + + The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or +printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a +configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label +on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a +Mageia system, you can run ifconfig on it +as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters +after "HWaddr". + + You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to +your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, +you can try the Network Printer - Find +Network Printer option in the Devices menu +and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it +says "host". + + If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a +protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the +list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list. + + Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find +which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names. +
+ +
+ Network printing protocols + + One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as +JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network +via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is +known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers +which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the +IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can +manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like +hp:/net/<name-of-the-printer> . In this case, fixed +IP-adress is not required. + + Choose the option AppSocket/HP JetDirect as the +protocol and set the address in Host:, do not change +the Port Number, unless you know that it needs to be +changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is +the same as above. + + + + + + + + The other protocols are: + + + + Internet Printing Protocol (ipp): a printer which can +be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by +some ADSL-routers. + + + + + + Internet Printing Protocol (https): the same as ipp, +but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be +defined. By default, the port 631 is used. + + + + + + Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): the same as ipp, but +with TLS secured protocol. + + + + + + LPD/LPR host or Printer: a printer which can be +accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using LPD. + + + + + + Windows printer via SAMBA: a printer connected to a +station running Windows or a SMB server and shared. + + + + The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form +the URI: + + + + Appsocket + + socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port + + + + Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) + + ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource + + http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource + + + + Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol + + lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue + + + + Additional information can be found in the CUPS +documentation. +
+ +
+ Device Properties + + You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to +parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your +system, but you can specify a different one with the +Server | Connect... menu, +another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters +of the server, following Server | +Settings. +
+ +
+ Troubleshoot + + You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by +inspecting /var/log/cups/error_log + + You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the +Help | Troubleshoot menu. +
+ +
+ Specifics + + It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in +Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the openprinting site to +check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package +is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, +redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report +the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this +tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer +works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other +up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices. + + Brother printers + + This +page give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver +for your device, download the rpm(s) and install. + + You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility. + + Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one +devices + + These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the +detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information +here. The +tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the System +menu. Also view configuration +for the management of the printer. + + A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner +features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't +allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this +case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the +picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, +open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory +card which is appeared in the /media folder. + + Samsung colour printer + + For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, this site provides drivers for +the QPDL protocol. + + Epson printers and scanners + + Drivers for Epson printers are available from this +search page. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data" +package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also +be available and is to install. Choose the rpm packages +according to your architecture. + + It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a +conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored. + + Canon printers + + For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint +available here . +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3138eb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + +יבוא מסמכים והגדרות מ־Windows + + transfugdrake + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing transfugdrake as root. + is found under the System tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled +Import Windows(TM) documents and settings + + The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings +from a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Vista +installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation. + + + Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake +immediately after pressing Next. + + + After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some +explanation about the tool and import options. + + As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the +Next button. This should run a detection of +Windows installation. + + When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to +choose accounts in Windows and +Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account +than yours own. + + + + + + + + + Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of +transfugdrake) limitations Windows +user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly. + + + + Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders. + + + + Some Windows applications +(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For +example, NVidia drivers in Windowsare updated using +UpdatusUser. Please do not use such accounts for the +import purposes. + + + When you finished with the accounts selection press +Next button. The next page is used to select a method +to import documents: + + + + + + + + Transfugdrake is designed to import Windows data from My +Documents, My Music and My +Pictures folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the +appropriate item in this window. + + When you finished with the document import method choosing press +Next button. The next page is used to select a method +to import bookmarks: + + + + + + + + Transfugdrake can import Internet Explorer and +Mozilla Firefox bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia +Mozilla Firefox instance. + + Choose the preferred import option and press the Next +button. + + + + +The next page allows you to import desktop background: + + + + + + + + Choose the preferred option and press the Next +button. + + The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the +Finish button. + + + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7305f2e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +משתמשים וקבוצות + + userdrake + + + + + + + + + This tool + You can start this tool from the command line, by typing userdrake as root. + is found under the System tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +"Manage users on system" + + The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this +means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings +(ID, shell, ...) + + When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in +the Users tab, and all the groups in the +Groups tab. Both tabs operate the same way. + + 1 Add User + + This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty: + + + + + + + + The field Full Name is intended for the +entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything +or nothing as well! + + Login is the only required field. + + Setting a Password is highly +recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the +password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should +use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The +shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves. + + Confirm Password field is there to ensure +you entered what you intended to. + + Login Shell is a drop down list that allows +you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are +Bash, Dash and Sh. + + Create a private group for the user, if +checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new +user as the only member (this may be edited). + + The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately +after you click on OK. + + 2 Add Group + + You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific +group ID. + + 3 Edit (a selected user) + + User Data: Allows you to modify all the data given +for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed). + + Account Info: + + + + + + + + The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. +Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary +accounts. + + The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long +as the account is locked. + + It is also possible to change the icon. + + Password Info: Allows you to set an +expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his +password periodically. + + + + + + + + Group: Here you can select the groups that +the user is a member of. + + + If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be +effective until his/her next login. + + + 4 Edit (with a group selected) + + Group Data: Allows you to modify the group +name. + + Group Users: Here you can select the users +who are members of the group + + 5 Delete + + Select a user or a group and click on Delete to remove it. For a user, a window appears to +ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group +has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well. + + + It is possible to delete a group which is not empty. + + + 6 Refresh + + The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to +refresh the display. + + 7 Guest Account + + guest is a special account. It is intended +to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login +is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications +to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the +end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click +in the menu on Actions -> Uninstall guest account. +
\ No newline at end of file -- cgit v1.2.1